Kodak Digital Camera NC2000e User Manual

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User’s Manual

KODAK

Professional

DCS 410

DCS 420

DCS 460

NC2000e

Digital Cameras

This manual and the accompanying software are protected by United States and international copyright laws. You may

make one backup copy of the enclosed software and one copy of this manual. Do not make additional copies of the

software or copies of the manual or electronically transmit them in any form whatsoever, in whole or in part, without

the prior written permission of Eastman Kodak Company.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WARRANTY

KODAK Professional DCS Digital Camera

THIS WARRANTY APPLIES TO EQUIPMENT PURCHASED IN THE

UNITED STATES.

Warranty Time Period

Kodak warrants your camera to be free from malfunctions and defects in

both materials and workmanship for six months from the date of purchase.

Warranty Repair Coverage

If this equipment does not function properly during the warranty period,

due to defects in either materials or workmanship, Kodak will, at its

option, either repair or replace the equipment, without charge, subject to

the conditions and limitations stated herein. Such repair service will

include all labor as well as any necessary adjustments and/or replacement

parts.

If replacement parts are used in making repairs, these parts may be

remanufactured, or may contain remanufactured materials. If it is neces-

sary to replace the entire system, it may be replaced with a

remanufactured system. If it should become necessary to repair or replace

a malfunctioning or defective system, the provisions of this warranty shall

apply to the repaired or replaced system until the expiration of 30 days

from the date of return, or until the end of the original warranty period,

whichever is later.

Kodak will also provide telephone assistance during the warranty period.

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Limitations

Warranty service will not be provided without return of the Warranty

Registration card or dated proof of purchase. Please return the Warranty

Registration card within 30 days of purchase.

As a condition of warranty service, before sending in your unit to the

nearest service center for repair, you must first contact a Kodak represen-

tative for return authorization and instructions.

This warranty becomes null and void if, during shipment, you fail to pack

your camera in a manner consistent with the enclosed repacking instruc-

tions in an appendix.

This warranty does not cover the following: circumstances beyond

Kodak’s control; service or parts to correct problems resulting from the

use of attachments, accessories or alterations not marketed by Kodak;

unauthorized modifications or service; misuse; abuse; failure to follow

Kodak’s operating, maintenance, or repacking instructions; or failure to

use Kodak supplied items (such as cables).

KODAK MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Repair or replacement

without charge is Kodak’s only obligation under this warranty. Kodak will

not be responsible for any consequential or incidental damages resulting

from the purchase, use, or improper functioning of this equipment even if

the loss or damage is caused by the negligence or other fault of Kodak.

Such damages for which Kodak will not be responsible include, but are

not limited to, loss of revenue or profit, downtime costs, loss of use of the

equipment, cost of any substitute equipment, facilities, or services, or

claims of your customers for such damages.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside the United States

In countries other than the United States, the terms of this warranty may

be different. Unless a specific Kodak warranty is communicated to the

purchaser in writing by a Kodak company, no other warranty or liability

exists beyond the information contained above, even though defect,

damage or loss may be by negligence or other act.

How to obtain service

In the United States, call 1-800-23-KODAK (1-800-235-6325), and in

Canada call 1-800-GO-KODAK (1-800-465-6325).

In other countries, call your nearest Kodak representative.

If service is required, your Kodak representative will instruct you to return

the unit to the nearest service center for repair and will issue a return

authorization number.

When returning a camera for repair, the unit shall be packed in its original

packing materials according to the enclosed repacking instructions in an

appendix. The enclosed problem report form (see appendices) should also

be completed and enclosed with the equipment. If the original packaging

has been discarded or is not available, packing will be at the owner’s

expense. (NOTE: The camera body that is supplied as part of the camera

should be included in the return.)

Return of the repaired or replaced unit to the customer can be expected in

five to seven days from the date the camera arrives at the service center.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EASTMAN KODAK COMPANY

Software License Agreement

YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS

BEFORE OPENING THE DISKETTE PACKAGE(S). OPENING THE DISKETTE

PACKAGE(S) INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDI-

TIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THEM, YOU SHOULD PROMPTLY RE-

TURN THE DISKETTE PACKAGE(S) UNOPENED, ALONG WITH THE ACCOMPA-

NYING MATERIALS.

Eastman Kodak Company (Kodak) provides this software and licenses its

use worldwide.

You assume responsibility for selection of the software to achieve your

intended results, and for installation, use, and results obtained from the

software.

LICENSE

You may:

a. use the software;

b. copy the software onto one or more computers only for the purpose of

operating the equipment with which this software was provided (the

“Related Equipment”) or into any machine-readable form for backup

purposes in support of your use of the software;

c. transfer the software and license to another party to whom you also

transfer the Related Equipment, if the other party agrees to accept the

terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you transfer the software,

you must at the same time either transfer all copies to the same party

or destroy any copies not transferred.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

You must reproduce and include the copyright notice on any copy of the

software.

YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY OR TRANSFER THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY

COPY, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED

FOR IN THIS LICENSE.

IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF THE RELATED EQUIPMENT OR

ANY COPY OF THE SOFTWARE TO ANOTHER PARTY, YOUR LICENSE

IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED.

TERM

The license is effective until terminated. You may terminate it at any time

by destroying the software together with all copies in any form. It will also

terminate upon conditions set forth elsewhere in the Agreement or if you

fail to comply with any term or condition of this Agreement. You agree

upon such termination to destroy the software together with all copies in

any form.

LIMITED WARRANTY

Kodak warrants the diskettes on which the software is furnished to be free

from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period

of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you as evidenced by a

copy of your receipt.

Kodak does not warrant that the functions contained in the software will

meet your requirements or that the operation of the software will be

uninterrupted or error free.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ‘AS IS’ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO

QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. IF

THE SOFTWARE PROVES DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT KODAK OR

YOUR DEALER) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY

SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION.

Some states do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the

above exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific

legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to

state.

LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES

Kodak’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be:

1. the replacement of any diskette not meeting Kodak’s “Limited War-

ranty” that is returned to Kodak or your dealer with a copy of your

receipt, or

2. if Kodak or the dealer is unable to deliver a replacement diskette that

is free of defects in materials or workmanship, you may terminate this

Agreement by returning the software.

IN NO EVENT WILL KODAK BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES,

INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCI-

DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE

OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF KODAK OR YOUR

DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM-

AGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.

Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for inci-

dental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion

may not apply to you.

viii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GENERAL

You may not sublicense, assign, or transfer the license or the software,

except as expressly provided in this Agreement. Any attempt otherwise to

sublicense, assign, or transfer any of the rights, duties, or obligations

hereunder is prohibited.

This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of New York.

Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement, you may

contact Kodak in the United States at 1-800-23-KODAK (1-800-235-

6325), in Canada at 1-800-GO-KODAK (1-800-465-6325), and in other

countries through your nearest Kodak representative.

YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT,

UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND

CONDITIONS. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT IT IS THE COMPLETE

AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN US,

WHICH SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT, ORAL

OR WRITTEN, AND ANY OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN US

RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Important Safeguards and

Precautions

The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is in-

tended to alert the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the equipment.

Read Instructions — Read all the safety and operating instructions

before operating the equipment.

Follow Instructions — Follow all operating and use instructions.

Controls — Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operat-

ing instructions.

Heed Warnings — Heed all warnings on the equipment and in the

operating instructions.

Retain Instructions and Packaging — Retain the safety and operating

instructions for future reference. Retain the packing case for use if the

equipment needs to be shipped.

Handling — Handle the equipment as you would any valuable

camera. Handle the equipment with care, especially when the hard

disk is running. Treat the imager as you would your best lens. Do not

drop the equipment. Mishandling can damage the imager resulting in

an expensive repair.

Accessories — Do not place the equipment on an unstable cart,

stand, bracket, or table. It can fall, causing serious injury to persons

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

and serious damage to the equipment. Use only with a stable cart,

stand, bracket, or table.

Cleaning — Unplug the camera from its AC battery charger/adapter

and from a computer. Be certain the camera off. Using a damp cloth,

clean only the outside cabinet and the liquid crystal display (LCD) on

the KODAK camera back. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol

cleaners on the outside of the equipment. (Refer to Chapter 7 for

directions on cleaning the imager in the camera back.)

Dust — If you operate the camera in environments with excessive

dust levels, dust may accumulate on the imager in the camera back.

(Refer to Chapter 7 for directions on cleaning the imager in the cam-

era back.)

CAUTION: Water and Moisture — Do not use the AC battery

charger/adapter near water — for example, near a sink, or in a wet

room or basement. Do not use the equipment in heavy rain and do

not immerse the equipment in water or other liquids.

Object or Liquid Entry — Never push foreign objects of any kind into

the equipment openings. The objects could touch dangerous voltage

points or short out parts and cause a fire or electric shock. Never spill

liquid of any kind on the equipment.

Attachments — Do not use attachments that are not recommended.

The use of such attachments may cause hazards and serious damage

to the equipment.

Power Sources — You should operate the equipment only from the

type of power source indicated on the name plate of the AC battery

charger/adapter. If you are not sure of the type of AC power that will

be used, consult a dealer or local power company.

Overloading — Do not overload power outlets and extension cords;

this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

Cables — Do not use cables other than those supplied with the

camera, except that an additional cable is required if you will use the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

camera as the only external device attached to a PowerBook com-

puter (refer to Chapter 4). Use only the SCSI cables supplied with the

camera to attach the camera or other peripherals to the computer. If

you use other cables, you may violate FCC emission requirements

and could corrupt data on the hard disk.

Power-Cord Protection — Route power-supply, and other cords, so

that you are not likely to walk on them or pinch them with items

placed on or against them; pay particular attention to cords at plugs,

receptacles, and the point where they leave the equipment.

Grounding — The AC battery charger/adapter is equipped with a

three-wire grounding-type plug with a third (grounding) pin. The

three-wire plug will fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a

safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet,

contact an electrician to replace the obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the

safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.

Lightning — For added protection for the equipment during a light-

ning storm, or any time when you will leave the equipment unat-

tended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the AC battery

charger/adapter from the power outlet and disconnect the camera

from the computer. This will protect the equipment from damage

caused by lightning or power-line surges.

Temperature, Humidity, Condensation — We do not recommend

operating the equipment outside the operating temperature or humid-

ity ranges as indicated in the Specifications appendix. If condensation

occurs, added time may be required to read from or write to a

PCMCIA card. Condensation may be present if the camera system

and/or PCMCIA card(s) are moved from a relatively cold environment

(like an air conditioned hotel room), into a warm, humid environ-

ment. We recommend that you allow sufficient time for the camera

system and/or PCMCIA cards to normalize within the specified

environmental ranges before operation. (Third-party, optional

xii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PCMCIA cards may have more restrictive operating temperature and

humidity ranges. Refer to the specifications for the cards you use.)

PCMCIA cards — PCMCIA cards (not supplied with the camera

system) are fragile devices that can be damaged if not treated with

care. Refer to the documentation accompanying any card(s) you

obtain to ensure that you are handling the card as specified in that

documentation, and that you are using the card within its operating

ranges for temperature, humidity, condensation, and so on.

Servicing — Do not attempt to service the equipment yourself.

Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or

other hazards. Never open the KODAK camera back. (Refer to Chap-

ter 7 for directions on separating the KODAK camera back from the

Nikon N90s Camera to clean a dirty imager.)

Damage Requiring Service — Unplug the equipment from the wall

outlet and computer, and refer all servicing to the manufacturer under

the following conditions:

When any cord or plug is damaged (send cord only).

If liquid has been spilled or if objects have fallen in the equip-

ment.

If the equipment has been exposed to rain or water.

If the equipment does not operate normally according to the

operating instructions.

If the equipment has been dropped or the housing has been

damaged.

When the equipment exhibits a distinct change in performance.

Disconnecting Parts — Do not separate the KODAK camera back

from the Nikon N90s camera. The system is shipped as a single unit;

do not disconnect the parts (except as described in Chapter 7 for

cleaning a dirty imager). Do not open or attempt to open the camera

back; doing so will void the warranty.

xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

You can connect the camera to a computer with or without a PCMCIA

card in the camera. Once the camera is connected to a computer, you

can insert/remove a PCMCIA card while the camera and computer are

turned on or turned off; however, do not remove a PCMCIA card from

the camera while the red “Card Busy” light on the camera back is

blinking. The blinking indicates that data are being read from or

written to the PCMCIA hard disk. If you do, you may lose the current

image, and may lose all of your images as well.

CAUTION: To prevent fire or shock hazard, use only the recommended

accessories or attachments.

Battery — Important Warnings

Do not attempt to remove the battery; it is not a customer serviceable

part.

If you will be operating the camera while it is connected to the AC

battery charger/adapter, the camera will be ready for operation almost

immediately. (However, if you are beginning with a dead battery, and

notice unusual behavior such as random characters flashing on the

camera back LCD, you may need to wait for approximately three

minutes while the adapter charges the battery.) If you will be operat-

ing the camera without the AC battery charger/adapter, you should

charge the battery for at least two hours before using as described in

Chapter 4.

If the unusual behavior continues for more than five minutes, the

battery may need to be replaced; contact Kodak.

xiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AC Battery Charger/Adapter — Important

Warnings

You should operate the equipment only from the type of power source

indicated on the name plate of the AC battery charger/adapter. A line

voltage outside of this range can destroy the AC battery charger/

adapter and/or the camera.

Use only the supplied AC battery charger/adapter; do not plug other

chargers or adapters into the camera.

The AC battery charger/adapter is for indoor use only.

Do not use the supplied AC battery charger/adapter for any purpose

other than for the camera.

Do not plug the AC battery charger/adapter into any equipment other

than the camera.

The rechargeable battery in the KODAK camera back becomes warm

during charging; this is normal operation.

Under normal conditions, charging the battery for at least two hours

provides optimal capacity. However, under very cold or very hot

conditions, charge for at least 30 minutes after the LCD battery

indicator indicates a full charge. Charge the battery as close to the

time the camera will be used as possible. (Waiting in excess of two

days before shooting will result in reduced battery capacity.)

Use the AC battery charger/adapter when connected to a computer if

possible; use without the adapter in this configuration for an extended

time period will drain the battery. Leaving the camera connected to

the AC battery charger/adapter will not maintain a full charge; there-

fore disconnect before use, then reconnect and charge for two hours

to ensure a full charge. Extended camera metering or focusing reduces

the number of images available from a charge.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electromagnetic Emissions

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits

are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-

ence in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can

radiate radio energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference

to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that

to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This equipment conforms with the requirements of European Standard

EN55022 with respect to radio interference for a Class B device.

Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques

dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe B

prescrites dans le réglement sur le broullage radioélectrique édicté par le

Ministère des Communications du Canada.

This digital apparatus does not exceed the class B limits for radio noise

emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regula-

tions of the Canadian Department of Communications.

xvi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

1 Before You Begin 1-1

Macintosh Computer — Hardware and Software 1-2

Required Computer, Memory, Hard Disk 1-2

Computer 1-2

Memory 1-2

Hard disk 1-2

Required Monitor and Display Card 1-2

Required Systems Software 1-3

Required SCSI Cables and Terminators 1-3

Required Applications Software 1-3

IBM PC or Compatible Computer — Hardware and Software 1-4

Required Computer, Memory, Hard Disk 1-4

Computer 1-4

Memory 1-4

Hard disk 1-4

Required Monitor and Display Card 1-4

Required SCSI Interface 1-5

Required Systems Software 1-5

Required Applications Software 1-5

Optional Hardware/Software for Playing Recorded Sound 1-5

Other Optional Equipment 1-6

Optional Camera Equipment 1-6

Optional PCMCIA Hard Disk Card 1-6

xvii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 Introduction 2-1

KODAK Camera Back 2-3

Features 2-4

3 Quick Start 3-1

4 Preparing the Camera and the Computer 4-1

Using the AC Battery Charger/Adapter 4-3

Charging the Battery 4-4

Setting the SCSI ID on the Camera 4-8

Installing a SCSI Host Adapter (TWAIN PC Only) 4-13

Making the SCSI Connection 4-14

Camera as the Sole SCSI Device 4-14

Camera Used with Other SCSI Devices 4-18

Camera Used with a Macintosh PowerBook or a PC Laptop 4-24

Macintosh PowerBook with No External SCSI Devices 4-24

PC (for TWAIN driver) 4-26

Inserting and Removing a PCMCIA Card 4-27

Inserting a PCMCIA Card 4-27

Removing a PCMCIA Card 4-31

Installing the KODAK Driver 4-33

Accessing the Camera from the Driver 4-36

Special Instructions for TWAIN-compliant Software 4-36

Final Steps to the Driver Window 4-38

Updating Camera Firmware 4-40

Formatting a PCMCIA Card 4-42

Quitting — Disconnecting the Camera from the Computer 4-45

5 Using the Camera 5-1

Readying the Nikon N90s Camera 5-2

Turning Off the Camera 5-8

xviii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Taking Pictures 5-8

Reading the Frames Remaining Indicator and the Frame Counter 5-9

Frames Remaining 5-9

Frame Counter 5-10

Deleting Pictures (Optional) 5-11

Recording Sound (Optional) 5-14

Turning off the Camera 5-15

Operating Differences with the Nikon N90s Camera 5-16

6 Tutorial — Accessing Camera Images 6-1

Working with Images Already on a PCMCIA Card 6-3

Accessing the Camera from the Driver 6-3

Viewing/Selecting an Image from the Camera with the Driver 6-5

Acquiring One Image from the Camera 6-8

Acquiring Multiple Images or a Contact Sheet 6-9

Rotate, Rename, and Annotate Images 6-11

Navigating Through Images 6-14

Navigating through a Contact Sheet 6-14

One or No Images Selected 6-14

More than One Image Selected 6-15

Preview 6-15

Applying Color Balance to Images 6-16

Applying Color Balance to a Single Image 6-17

Method A: Lighting Menu 6-18

Method B: Click-Balance Tool 6-18

Applying Color Balance to Multiple Selected Images 6-20

Saving Color Balance Changes 6-21

Crop Images 6-21

Close the Driver Image Window Saving Changes) 6-25

Working with Images in the Studio 6-26

Playing Recorded Sound Files 6-29

xix

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Tutorial — Accessing Camera Images (con t in u ed )

Archive and Delete Images 6-30

(Optional) Create Archive Files 6-30

Delete Files 6-32

Revise Preferences 6-32

Quitting 6-32

7 Reference — Camera 7-1

KODAK Camera Back and Imager 7-2

Timing Considerations 7-3

KODAK Camera Back Controls 7-4

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) 7-4

Battery Indicator 7-6

Frames Remaining Indicator — KODAK Camera Back 7-7

Frame Counter — Nikon N90s Camera 7-7

ISO Warning 7-9

Disk Indicator 7-10

Disk Error Indicator 7-10

Control Buttons 7-11

DELETE Button and Delete Indicator 7-12

SCSI ID Button and SCSI Indicator 7-15

SCSI Connector (KODAK Camera Back) 7-17

Multipurpose Connector (KODAK Camera Back) 7-18

PCMCIA Cards 7-19

Supported PCMCIA Cards 7-19

Card Busy Light 7-20

DOS Formatting and Card Access 7-20

Troubleshooting, Disk Recovery, and Fragmentation 7-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Camera Operating Configurations 7-22

Supported Configurations 7-22

Taking Pictures While Connected to the Computer 7-23

Using the Camera with a PCMCIA Card 7-23

Using the Camera Without a PCMCIA Card While Connected to a

Computer 7-24

Battery and AC Battery Charger/Adapter 7-25

Battery Charging for Optimal Capacity 7-25

AC Battery Charger/Adapter 7-26

External Battery Adapter 7-27

Recorded Sound 7-28

How to Record Sound 7-29

Recording “Lengthy” Audio Segments 7-30

Sound File Size 7-31

Playing Sound Files 7-31

On/Off State of the KODAK Camera Back 7-32

Troubleshooting the Camera 7-33

Cleaning the Imager 7-41

Determining If the Imager is Dirty 7-41

Examine a Test Image 7-41

Visually Inspect the Imager 7-41

Cleaning a Dirty Imager 7-43

Separating the Camera from the KODAK Camera Back 7-43

Wiping the Imager 7-49

Reassembling the Camera 7-51

Using a Flash 7-53

Calibration (CAL) Files — DCS 460 Only 7-54

xxi

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 Reference — Kodak Driver Software 8-1

General Features 8-2

Defaults — Driver Image Window 8-5

Commands 8-6

Source Menu 8-6

Camera 8-7

Folder 8-7

Choose Folder 8-7

View Menu 8-7

Contact Sheet 8-8

Preview 8-8

Test Shot 8-10

Photoshop Menus 8-12

Photoshop Edit Menu 8-12

Photoshop Select menu 8-12

All 8-12

None 8-12

Acquire As Menu 8-13

Photo 8-13

Contact Sheet 8-13

Acquire Contact Sheet Dialog 8-15

Document Name 8-15

Output Resolution 8-16

Size (Thumbnails) 8-16

Show Crop Rectangle (Thumbnails) 8-16

Printable Area Width and Height 8-16

Cancel 8-16

OK 8-16

xxii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Take Picture Icon 8-17

Camera Control Icon 8-17

Load Camera Firmware 8-19

Set Clock 8-20

Erase 8-20

Format 8-20

Recover 8-21

Self Test 8-22

Done 8-22

Preferences Icon 8-23

Default Acquire Resolution 8-23

12-Bit Acquire 8-24

Show Tool Tips 8-24

Units: Inches/Centimeters 8-24

Acquired Contact Sheet Layout 8-25

Factory Settings 8-25

Cancel 8-25

OK 8-25

Rename Images Icon 8-25

Name 8-26

Sequence Number: Digits and Starting From 8-26

Example 8-27

Rename 8-27

Cancel 8-27

Rotate Clockwise/Counterclockwise Icons 8-28

xxiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 Reference — Kodak Driver Software (con t in u ed )

Commands (continued)

Crop Icon 8-28

Introduction 8-28

The Crop Dialog Box 8-30

Method: Freeform and Fixed Size 8-31

Size 8-31

Left, Top, Width, and Height 8-32

Fix Aspect Ratio 8-32

Final Output 8-33

Remove 8-33

Cancel 8-33

OK 8-33

Crop New Images after Shutter Release 8-33

Navigation Buttons 8-33

Lighting Menu 8-34

Click-Balance Tool 8-35

Sound Menu 8-38

Acquire Button 8-39

Copy To Button 8-40

Archive Image File Format 8-40

Delete Button 8-41

Done Button 8-42

Annotation Area and Image Information Window 8-42

Navigation Bar 8-44

Contact Sheet View 8-44

Preview View or Crop Dialog 8-44

Select All Icon 8-45

Number of Images Selected 8-45

The X-Y Cursor Location 8-45

xxiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RGB Values at the Cursor Location 8-46

Thumbnail/Preview Size Menu 8-46

Using Photoshop “Actions” (Macintosh Only) 8-47

Supported Commands 8-49

Driver Commands Not Supported 8-50

Troubleshooting — Kodak Driver Software 8-51

Messages — Kodak Driver Software 8-54

9 Appendices 9-1

Appendix A — Specifications DCS 410, DCS 420, DCS 460, NC2000e A-1

Appendix B — Glossary B-1

Appendix C — Updating Your KODAK Software Driver C-1

Appendix D — Repacking Instructions D-1

Appendix E — Problem Report Form E-1

Appendix F — Using an Infrared Camera (DCS 420IR Only) F-1

Appendix G — Technical and Telephone Assistance G-1

Appendix H — Optional Equipment & Spare Parts List H-1

10 Index 10-1

xxv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_{. . . . . . .}1_{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .}

Before You Begin

NOTE: Before you continue, complete and submit the enclosed Warranty Regis-

tration card. You should also read the Warranty and the Software License Agree-

ment for the product.

Check the following lists to ensure that you have the required and optional

computer hardware and software, and camera accessories, to use the

available models of the camera. (Model numbers are included in the

Specifications appendix.)

The camera can be used with a Macintosh computer and/or with an IBM

PC or compatible computer. Separate specifications for both are included

on the following pages. (You may be able to use the camera on other

computer platforms, or with additional operating systems, using drivers

prepared by companies other than Kodak, or by developing your own

driver. Contact Kodak for information.)

Before You Begin

1-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Macintosh Computer — Hardware

and Software

The following sections list the required and optional computer hardware

and software needed to run the Kodak Driver for use with Adobe Photo-

shop Software on an Apple Macintosh computer.

IMPORTANT: Refer to the read-me files on the supplied software driver diskette

for additional details or revisions to these requirements.

Required Computer, Memory, Hard Disk

Computer

An Apple Macintosh computer with a 68020 processor or above, or

Power Macintosh product line is required.

Memory

Memory in megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM) that are

required:

32 MB RAM required for DCS 410, DCS 420, NC2000e.

64 MB RAM required for DCS 460.

Hard disk

At least 100 megabytes of free disk space are needed.

Required Monitor and Display Card

A color monitor is required for color work. A display with a minimum

640 x 480 pixel resolution is required, with 1024 x 768 pixel resolution

preferred; a PowerBook monitor with a 640 x 400 pixel resolution is also

1-2

Before You Begin

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

acceptable. You need the appropriate display card for the monitor in use;

we recommend a 16-bit or 24-bit video display card (which can display

more than 16.7 million colors). Neither the amount of data stored for each

image, nor the quality of any printed output, is affected by the monitor or

card in use. If you do not have a 24-bit display card, the software auto-

matically dithers the display data to achieve the best looking image.

Required Systems Software

Apple System software version 7.5 or greater.

Required SCSI Cables and Terminators

Use only the supplied cables; do not use substitute cables, except that an

additional cable is required if you will use the camera as the only external

device attached to a PowerBook computer. (If you are using a PowerBook

computer, refer to Chapter 4.)

Appropriate SCSI terminator(s), as required for your computer system.

Required Applications Software

Adobe Photoshop 3.0.4 or greater.

Before You Begin

1-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IBM PC or Compatible Computer —

Hardware and Software

These sections list required and optional hardware and software needed

to run the Kodak drivers for TWAIN-compliant PC applications.

IMPORTANT: Refer to the read-me files on the supplied software driver diskette

for additional details or revisions to these requirement.

Required Computer, Memory, Hard Disk

NOTE: Your TWAIN application, or systems software, may have additional

hardware requirements beyond those listed below.

Computer

An 80486 processor or above is required; a 100 MHz Pentium processor

or above is recommended.

Memory

A minimum of 64 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM) are

required.

Hard disk

At least 100 megabytes of free hard disk space is necessary.

Required Monitor and Display Card

A color monitor is required for color work. VGA or compatible display

with a minimum 640 x 480 pixel resolution is required, with 1024 x 768

pixel resolution preferred. You need the appropriate 16-bit display card

1-4

Before You Begin

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

for the monitor in use; we recommend a 24-bit display card. A 16-bit card

can display up to 32,768 colors, while a 24-bit card can display more

than 16.7 million colors. (Neither the amount of data stored for each

image, nor the quality of any printed output, is affected by the monitor or

card in use.) If you do not have a 24-bit display card, the software auto-

matically dithers the display data to achieve the best looking image.

Required SCSI Interface

ASPI (Advanced SCSI Programming Interface) Windows host adapter such

as those from Adaptec, Inc. running EZ-SCSI 4.0 or later.

If other external SCSI devices are connected to your computer, you may

need to obtain a SCSI terminator depending on the termination of devices

in the SCSI chain.

Required Systems Software

Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0.

Required Applications Software

A TWAIN-compliant software application. The Kodak driver for use with

TWAIN-compliant PC applications can be used with software such as

Adobe Photoshop and may work with other software applications that

support TWAIN specifications.

Optional Hardware/Software for Playing

Recorded Sound

A hardware sound board is required if you want to play the “.WAV” files

you can record with the microphone in the camera.

Before You Begin

1-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other Optional Equipment

For information about optional equipment, refer to the appendix “Op-

tional Equipment & Spare Parts List” and to the text files installed during

software installation that list system and software solutions available from

third party vendors.

Optional Camera Equipment

Kodak accessories, for example a shutter release cable and PCMCIA

cards.

Electronic flash and accessories.

Extra lenses for the camera.

Close-up accessories.

Nikon remote control accessories.

Finder accessories.

Optional PCMCIA Hard Disk Card

The camera is designed to accept PCMCIA hard disk cards that support

the PCMCIA “ATA” interface and operate in 8-bit transfer mode. Refer to

the read-me files on the supplied software driver diskette for information

on specific cards known to work with the camera.

1-6

Before You Begin

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_{. . . . . . .}2_{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .}

Introduction

This chapter includes:

A brief introduction to the design of the camera.

An overview of the product features.

NOTE: This manual assumes that you are familiar with the operation of the Nikon

N90s camera; if you are not, refer to the Nikon instruction manual for the Nikon

N90s supplied with the camera.

Introduction

2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

This camera system takes and stores high-resolution digital images. You

can attach the camera to one of several computers and move your images

from the camera to the computer using one of the special software drivers

provided by Kodak. You can then use the image in other applications or

edit it with your image editing software. You can also record sound with

the built-in microphone in the camera and play the sound files through

your computer system.

2-2

Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KODAK Camera Back

The KODAK camera back is a sealed, one-piece unit. A single mounting

screw attaches it to an unmodified Nikon N90s camera body that has had

its film back removed.

NIKON N90s CAMERA

(with film back removed)

KODAK CAMERA BACK

Mounting screw

Introduction

2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Features

The KODAK camera back incorporates the following features:

FRONT VIEW

Imager

Tripod socket

Mounting screw

A KODAK charge coupled device (CCD) imager with image data

recorded as listed in the Specifications appendix.

Exposure indexes equivalent to film speeds as listed in the Specifica-

tions appendix.

Dynamic random access memory (DRAM) that supports shooting as

listed in the Specifications appendix.

A mounting screw rigidly mates the camera back to the camera.

A tripod socket.

2-4

Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BACK VIEW

LCD

Microphone

Record button

DELETE button

Card busy light

DELETE

CARD BUSY

SCSI ID

Remove/insert

PCMCIA card

here.

SCSI port

SCSI ID button

Multipurpose connector

A PCMCIA-ATA Type III slot designed to accept PCMCIA cards that

support the “ATA” protocol and operate in 8-bit mode.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) that shows status and control informa-

tion.

A SCSI port to connect the camera to your computer for transferring

images from the camera to your computer. You can take pictures

while the camera is connected to a computer. The images are then

immediately available on the computer. The camera back is a non-

terminated SCSI device.

A single, rechargeable nickel hydride battery that powers both the

camera back and the camera; the Specifications appendix lists the

number of frames you can expect from a fully-charged battery in

typical shooting situations.

Two controls — one sets the camera back SCSI ID; the other deletes

the most recent image from the PCMCIA card.

Introduction

2-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A built-in microphone records sound as “.WAV” files at “telephone

quality”— 8-bits, 11 kilohertz, monaural.

Software drivers to move images from the camera back to your

computer. You can also use the drivers to perform self-tests on the

camera from your computer, and to load new firmware (camera

control programming) into the camera. This last function allows you

to keep the firmware in the camera up-to-date without sending the

camera to a service center.

2-6

Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_{. . . . . . .}3_{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .}

Quick Start

This chapter provides a brief summary of the steps you follow to use the

camera. Most steps refer you to more detailed explanations elsewhere in

this manual; you can also refer to the quick reference and tips card.

If you are experienced with previous Kodak digital cameras, with

personal computers, and with the Nikon N90s, you may be able to

follow these steps without referring to other material.

If you are inexperienced with previous Kodak digital cameras, with

personal computers, and with the Nikon N90s, read through the steps

below (without following them), as an overview. Then proceed

through the manual for a thorough explanation of each step.

Quick Start

3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Obtain and mount a lens on the camera.

A lens is not supplied with the camera system, but is available from

Kodak (and elsewhere). Refer to the appendix “Optional Equipment &

Spare Parts List,” and to the quick reference card regarding lens

behavior.

2. Obtain one or more supported PCMCIA cards.

PCMCIA cards are not supplied with the camera system, but are

available from Kodak (and elsewhere). The camera accepts cards that

support the PCMCIA “ATA interface and operate in 8-bit mode. Refer

to the read-me file on the supplied driver diskette for supported cards,

and to the appendix “Optional Equipment & Spare Parts List.”

3. PC customers only: obtain and install — if not already present — a

supported SCSI host adapter card.

Supported adapters are listed in Chapter 1; brief installation informa-

tion is in Chapter 4.

4. (Optional) PC customers only: Obtain and install a sound board — if

not already present — required to play sounds recorded with the

camera system.

5. Install the supplied software driver.

A. Macintosh: Load the first diskette for the Macintosh driver. Review

its read-me file. Double-click the installer and follow the instruc-

tions it presents to install the software. Refer to Chapter 4.

B. PC: Load the first diskette for the TWAIN (PC) driver. Review its

read-me file. Run the SETUP program to install the TWAIN driver

supplied by Kodak. Refer to Chapter 4.

3-2

Quick Start

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. DCS 460 Only: Install the Calibration File.

A. Macintosh: Load the diskette with the calibration (CAL) file for

your camera. Copy the calibration file (its name ends with the

characters “.CAL”) into the folder containing your Photoshop

plug-ins (it is probably named PLUG-INS). Refer to Chapter 4.

B. TWAIN (PC): Load the diskette with the calibration (CAL) file for

your camera. Run the SETUP program to install the calibration

file.

7. Attach the supplied AC battery charger/adapter.

Connect the adapter to a source supplying power within the range on

its label, and to the connector on the lower left corner of the camera

back. The first time it is used, allow the battery to charge for at least

two hours shortly before it is used. Refer to Chapter 4. The section

“Battery Charging for Optimal Capacity” in Chapter 7 includes

important battery information.

8. Set the Camera SCSI ID.

Turn on the camera system (set the Nikon N90s on/off switch to “on”),

push the camera back SCSI button once to enter SCSI mode, and then

repeatedly to rotate through SCSI IDs. Stop at the desired ID. Do not

select an ID that conflicts with any in use on your computer system.

Refer to Chapter 4.

9. Connect the camera system to your Computer.

For this step we encourage all customers to refer to the detailed

instructions in Chapter 4 to ensure that this connection is made

properly before continuing. There you will turn off your computer,

and connect the camera, a non-terminated SCSI device, to the com-

puter.

Quick Start

3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. Place a supported PCMCIA card into the camera.

Open the door on the side of the camera, push the PCMCIA card

firmly into place, and close the door. (Do not be startled by the red

Card Busy light that blinks briefly, or by the slight noise.) Refer to

Chapter 4.

11. Update the camera firmware.

This onetime action ensures that the most current control commands

(firmware) are loaded in the camera. Refer to Chapter 4.

A. Run Adobe Photoshop and choose

K^ODAKDCS 400/EOS•DCS/NC2000 from the IMPORT submenu of

the Adobe Photoshop 4.0 F^ILEmenu. The driver image window

appears.

B. Click the camera control icon, shown below. Click the L^OAD

CAMERA FIRMWARE icon.

3-4

Quick Start

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NOTES: For earlier supported versions of Photoshop, choose the driver from

the A^CQUIREsubmenu of the FILE menu.

For other supported TWAIN applications on the PC, access the TWAIN driver

through the select-then-acquire process used by your application to access

the driver image window.

12. Format a PCMCIA card.

Your PCMCIA card must be (DOS) formatted by the camera. Format-

ting destroys any files that may be on the card. Click the camera

control icon as described in the previous step. Click F^ORMAT, a one-

time process for each card you use. Refer to Chapter 4.

13. Take pictures with the camera.

The camera is now ready to take pictures. Use it while connected to a

computer and/or the AC battery charger/adapter. Or you can use the

camera without the computer or adapter. When you are finished with

the camera, you can leave it connected to the computer or you can

turn off the computer, then disconnect the adapter and the camera.

Refer to Chapter 5.

14. Record sound.

With the camera system on and awake, hold the back of the camera

about six inches (15 cm) from your mouth (the microphone is behind

four small holes centered at the top of the camera back). Press and

hold the record button (to the right and below the microphone), and

speak into the microphone. Refer to Chapter 5. Recorded sound files

can be played by the computer; they cannot be played by the camera.

Refer to Chapters 6 and 8.

15. Move images from the camera system to the computer.

With equipment off, reconnect the camera system to the computer (if

needed), run your application, access the driver image window as

described above. Thumbnails of pictures you have taken appear in the

Quick Start

3-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

window. Scroll through images, select one or more, adjust color using

the balance controls, crop, and acquire the image into your applica-

tion by clicking the A^CQUIREbutton. And/or move images to an archive

folder on your computer by selecting the image(s) and using the C^OPY

^TObutton. Refer to Chapters 6 and 8.

16. Quit

Click the D^ONEbutton to leave the driver. Quit your application

software. Shut down your computer system. Disconnect the AC

battery charger/adapter from the camera back; turn off the Nikon

N90s.

3-6

Quick Start

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_{. . . . . . .}4_{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .}

Preparing the Camera

and the Computer

This chapter describes the series of steps you follow to prepare the camera

for use in a Macintosh or PC computer environment. This includes how to:

Charge the battery and use the AC battery charger/adapter.

Set the SCSI ID on the camera.

Make the SCSI connection between the camera and your computer.

Install the driver for Adobe Photoshop Software on your Macintosh

computer or the TWAIN driver on your PC.

Insert and remove your PCMCIA card.

Access the driver for Adobe Photoshop Software.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Load and/or update camera firmware.

Format a PCMCIA card for use with the camera.

IMPORTANT: We assume that you are familiar with the operation of your

computer. If you are not, refer to the manuals that accompany that computer

before continuing.

Before you continue, if you have not completed and returned the enclosed

Warranty Registration card, please do so now.

CAUTION: In this chapter you will connect the camera to your computer.

Once connected, do not disconnect the camera from the computer while

using the supplied software, or even while the computer is on. Doing so

may result in the loss of data from the PCMCIA card in the camera or from

the hard disk in your computer. Instead, turn off all equipment in the order

described at the end of this chapter before disconnecting the camera.

4-2

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the AC Battery Charger/

Adapter

Keep the following battery considerations in mind as you use the camera.

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to remove the battery; it is not a cus-

tomer serviceable part.

IMPORTANT: The section “Battery Charging for Optimal Capacity” in

Chapter 7 includes important battery information.

The camera incorporates a single, rechargeable nickel hydride battery

that powers both the camera back and the camera; no batteries are

installed in the camera.

The Specifications appendix lists the number of frames you can expect

from a full-charged battery in typical shooting situations.

When the camera will be used in the field, charge the battery as close

to the time it will be used as possible.

You can operate the camera while connected to the supplied AC

battery charger/adapter, or you can recharge the battery with the

adapter and then use the camera in the field without the adapter.

The adapter will run the camera continuously while charging the

battery.

You can leave the camera continually connected to the AC battery

charger/adapter, however, this will not maintain a full charge. Discon-

nect and then reconnect the charger before use, and charge for two

hours to ensure a full charge.

If you are using the camera in an environment in which a power

outlet is available, we recommend that you operate the camera while

connected to the AC battery charger/adapter as described below.

Refer to Chapter 7 for information on the effect of temperature ex-

tremes on battery operation.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Charging the Battery

You should charge the battery for two hours before using the camera for

the first time, and thereafter on a regular basis as needed. Charging the

battery in this way will ensure that you begin shooting with a fully

charged battery, and that you obtain the most images per charge.

Follow these steps to charge the battery.

1. Locate the AC battery charger/adapter and power cord supplied with

the camera.

AC BATTERY CHARGER/ADAPTER

To camera

POWER CORD

To AC battery charger/adapter

To wall outlet

2. Plug the appropriate end of the power cord into the AC battery

charger/adapter.

4-4

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Plug the other end of the power cord into a wall outlet.

4. Plug the AC battery charger/adapter into the camera; the unit plugs

into the round connector at the lower left corner of the back of the

camera.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. The first time the camera is used, allow the battery to charge for two

hours.

IMPORTANT: An LCD at the top left corner of the camera back displays a

battery icon.

LCD GRAPHICS

KODAK camera back LCD

DELETE

SCSI ID

Battery indicator

CARD BUSY

While the battery is charging, the three segments of this icon light repeat-

edly in turn from bottom to top; when the battery is fully charged all three

remain lit.

Filling battery

When the camera is used without the adapter, the number of lit segments

indicates the charge state of the battery. When the bottom segment is blink-

ing, the battery needs recharging.

4-6

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. (Optional) Use the supplied accessory adapter cable as shown in the

following illustration. Doing so allows simultaneous use of the AC

battery charger/adapter and optional shutter release accessory (refer to

the appendix “Optional Equipment & Spare Parts List” for ordering

information). Plug the shutter release accessory into an empty connec-

tor on the accessory adapter cable.

Accessory adapter cable

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the SCSI ID on the Camera

In this section you will set the SCSI identification (ID) number for the

camera. Each SCSI device connected to the same computer must have a

different ID number.

CAUTION: This section assumes that the camera and the computer are not

currently connected. You should never change the SCSI ID on the camera

when it is connected to a computer.

1. Shut down your computer.

2. If SCSI devices other than the camera are connected to your

computer, for example a hard disk, determine their SCSI identification

numbers so that you can select a different number for the camera. If

necessary, refer to the instructions for those devices to determine how

to find their numbers.

NOTE: Since you may connect the camera to different computers, or since

you may change the external devices connected to the computer you

regularly use with the camera, you should ensure that the camera has a

unique SCSI ID each time you connect it to the computer.

4-8

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Turn on the camera as shown below.

Power switch set to ON

Shutter release button

MODE

OFF

ISO

DRIVE

4. Wake the camera by lightly pressing the shutter release button.

NOTES: The camera turns off after several seconds of inactivity; therefore, as

you complete these steps you may need to reawaken the camera by lightly

pressing the shutter release button again.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Locate the indented button on the back of the camera labeled “SCSI

ID.”

SCSI ID button

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

4-10

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Press the SCSI ID button once with your fingertip or a blunt object;

this action wakes SCSI mode. The characters “SCSI” (called the SCSI

indicator), as well as a single value from 0 to 7, “PC,” and “PP”

appear on the camera back LCD. That value is the current SCSI ID of

the camera.

SCSI ID

SCSI indicator

SCSI

SCSI ID button

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. While “SCSI” still appears on the LCD, you change the current SCSI

ID by pressing the SCSI ID button repeatedly. The ID rotates through

the values 0 to 7, “PC,” and “PP.” Stop when you have the SCSI ID

you want, using the separate information below for Macintosh and

TWAIN (PC).

A camera set to a SCSI ID currently in use by another connected SCSI

device may not respond to the computer; instead, the camera will

flash the SCSI indicator on the camera back LCD. If this occurs, shut

down the computer, disconnect the camera, reset the SCSI ID on the

camera as described in this section, and try again.

Macintosh: Do not use the SCSI values 0 (usually your internal hard disk) or 7

(usually your computer), do not select “PC” or “PP,” and do not use a number

currently assigned to any other connected SCSI device such as a CD-ROM

drive which is usually number 3 if it is an internal drive supplied by Apple

Computer, Inc.

TWAIN (PC): Do not use a number currently assigned to any other connected

SCSI device. Do not assign the number used by your SCSI host adapter.

Consult your SCSI host adapter manual to see if other SCSI IDs should not be

used.

“PC” SETTING FOR IBM LAPTOP CUSTOMERS (not for use with the

Macintosh): Use the “PC” SCSI ID setting only if you will be connecting the

camera to an IBM or compatible laptop computer using a PCMCIA-to-SCSI II

adapter (such as the Adaptec SlimSCSI used with EZ-SCSI 4.0 or the New

Media Bus Toaster), to connect the PCMCIA slot on your laptop (not the

camera) to the SCSI connector on the camera. “PC” sets the SCSI ID of the

camera to 1 and turns on active termination in the camera.

When you finish, take the camera out of “PC” mode, turn off the computer

and camera. If left in “PC” mode, a fully charged battery will be exhausted in

approximately eight hours since the camera can not change to low power

mode when this SCSI setting is active.

“PP” SETTING: The “PP” setting, although it appears, is not currently sup-

ported and should not be selected for use with the Kodak driver.

4-12

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing a SCSI Host Adapter

(TWAIN PC Only)

The camera connects to your PC at a SCSI port provided by installing one

of the supported SCSI host adapter cards. If your PC already has a sup-

ported card installed, continue at the next section.

CAUTION: Only trained and qualified technical personnel should perform the

following procedure. You should contact a computer service professional to

configure and install an ASPI host adapter card such as those available from

Adaptec, Inc. running EZ-SCSI 4.0 or later. The installer should read all manufac-

turers’ instructions for both the computer and the host adapter before installing

the adapter in your computer.

1. Turn off the power to the computer, then to all peripherals.

2. If the termination power setting on your SCSI host adapter is disabled,

change its setting to enable it.

3. Install the SCSI Host Adapter card for your PC according to the

manufacturer’s installation instructions. When installation is complete,

a SCSI2 connector should be available on the back of your PC. The

figures in this chapter are intended to illustrate a typical computer

(Macintosh or PC).

BACK OF PC AFTER INSTALLING SCSI HOST ADAPTER

SCSI2 Port

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Making the SCSI Connection

The camera is a non-terminated SCSI device that connects to your

Macintosh computer or PC with one of the included SCSI cables. In

normal usage you may connect and disconnect the camera from the

computer on a regular basis; for this reason you may want to position

your computer so that its SCSI connector is readily accessible.

Three sets of instructions follow.

I. The camera is the sole SCSI device.

II The camera is used with other SCSI devices.

NOTE: You may need to obtain a SCSI terminator to complete these steps if

other external SCSI devices are connected to your computer. A single 25-pin

SCSI terminator is supplied with the camera.

III. The camera is used with a Macintosh PowerBook or a PC laptop.

Read the section that matches the environment in which you will use the

camera

I. Camera as the Sole SCSI Device

Follow these steps if you will connect the camera as the sole external SCSI

device attached to your computer

1. Turn off the camera and the computer.

IMPORTANT: Later when you connect and disconnect the computer and the

camera on a regular basis, make sure that the computer is off.

2. Place the camera in a convenient position next to your computer.

4-14

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Connect the AC battery charger/adapter to the camera as described

earlier in this chapter. Although this step is optional, we recommend it

whenever the camera is connected to a computer.

4. Select the appropriate SCSI cable for your Macintosh (with 25-pin

connectors at both ends), or PC (with a 50-pin SCSI2 HD connector at

one end and a 25-pin SCSI connector at the other end.).

IMPORTANT: Use only the cable supplied with the camera; do not use a

substitute cable.

MACINTOSH:

25-pin Connector

PC — for TWAIN driver:

50-pin SCSI2 HD Connector

25-pin SCSI Connector

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Follow the appropriate part of this step for either a Macintosh or a PC.

MACINTOSH: Attach one 25-pin connector to the SCSI port on the

back of the Macintosh computer. Make sure the connector is well

seated by pressing it into place firmly, and then tighten both knobs on

the cable connector.

Knobs

PC: Attach the 50-pin SCSI2 connector to the SCSI2 port on the back

of the PC. Make sure the cable connector is well seated by pressing it

into place firmly, so that the spring-clips on the connector snap onto

the SCSI port.

4-16

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Attach the appropriate end of the supplied 25-pin SCSI terminator to

the other end of the SCSI cable you just attached to your computer.

BACK OF

COMPUTER

25-pin Terminator

7. Attach the open end of the 25-pin terminator to the SCSI connector

on the back of the camera.

Camera

SCSI Port

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. (Optional) Later, to disconnect the camera from the computer, shut

down the computer and then power off the camera. Then disconnect

the terminator from the camera and the SCSI cable from the computer.

Do not leave a SCSI cable with an empty connector/terminator

dangling from your computer.

Continue at “Inserting and Removing a PCMCIA Card” later in this

chapter.

II. Camera Used with Other SCSI Devices

NOTE: If other external SCSI devices are connected to your computer, you may

need to obtain a SCSI terminator to complete these steps.

Follow these steps if one or more external SCSI devices are already

connected to your computer.

Multiple SCSI devices are connected to the computer in a chain. If the

camera is one of multiple SCSI devices connected to your computer, it

must be connected as the last device in the chain of SCSI devices since it

only includes one SCSI connector.

The total cable length connecting all devices must not exceed 15 feet (4.6

meters).

You will need to determine if the connected SCSI devices are terminated

or not. To do so, first look for an external SCSI terminator on the devices.

Because some devices contain internal terminators, also check the in-

structions for your devices to determine if they are terminated internally,

and if they are whether that termination is currently active.

We provide two sets of instructions. Follow the first set (A) if none of the

connected devices are terminated or if one of the devices is terminated

externally. Follow the second set (B) if one of the devices — it should be

the last device in the chain — is terminated internally.

4-18

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A. Follow these steps if none of the connected

devices are terminated or if one of the devices

is terminated externally.

1. Turn off the computer, and all connected SCSI devices.

IMPORTANT: Later, when you connect and disconnect the computer and the

camera on a regular basis, make sure that all devices are off.

2. Place the camera in a convenient position next to the last device in

the SCSI chain of devices connected to your computer.

3. Connect the AC battery charger/adapter to the camera as described

earlier in this chapter. Although this step is optional, we recommend it

whenever the camera is connected to a computer.

4. When you have completed part A or part B of this step, the last device

in the chain should have a cable (with no terminator) connected to

one of its SCSI connector, and the other connector should be empty.

BACK OF

COMPUTER

BACK OF ONE OR MORE

NON-INTERNALLY TERMINATED

SCSI DEVICES

Empty SCSI Connector

A. If there is an external SCSI terminator on an otherwise empty SCSI

connector on the last device, remove it.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B. If there is an external SCSI terminator between the end of a cable

and a SCSI connector on a device, remove the terminator, and

then reconnect the cable. (Later, if you remove the camera cable

from your computer, remember to replace this terminator.)

5. Select the SCSI cable with the 50-pin connector at one end and the

25-pin connector at the other end.

IMPORTANT: Use only the cable supplied with the camera; do not use a

substitute cable.

50-pin Connector

25-pin Connector

6. Connect the 50-pin connector to the empty connector on the last SCSI

device in the chain. Make sure the connector is well seated by press-

ing it into place firmly, and then pinch the thin wire clamps over its

base.

25-pin Connector

50-pin Connector

4-20

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. Attach the supplied 25-pin terminator to the other end of the SCSI

cable and then to the camera.

Camera

SCSI Connector

25-pin Connector

25-pin Terminator

8. (Optional) Later, to disconnect the camera from the computer, turn off

the computer and all external SCSI devices, and then power off the

camera. Then restore the SCSI cables and terminator to the state they

were in before the camera was connected. Do not leave a SCSI cable

with an empty connector dangling from a SCSI chain.

Continue at “Inserting and Removing a PCMCIA Card” later in this

chapter.

B. Follow these steps if the last connected

device is terminated internally.

1. Turn off the computer, and all connected SCSI devices.

IMPORTANT: Later when you connect and disconnect the computer and the

camera on a regular basis, make sure that all devices are off.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Place the camera in a convenient position next to the last device in

the SCSI chain of devices connected to your computer.

3. Connect the AC battery charger/adapter to the camera as described

earlier in this chapter. Although this step is optional, we recommend it

whenever the camera is connected to a computer.

4. Select the SCSI cable with the 50-pin connector at one end and the

25-pin connector at the other end.

IMPORTANT: Use only the cable supplied with the camera; do not use a

substitute cable.

50-pin Connector

25-pin Connector

5. Connect the 50-pin connector to the empty SCSI connector of the

device that is terminated internally. Make sure the connector is well

seated by pressing it into place firmly, and then pinch the thin wire

clamps over its base.

BACK OF

COMPUTER

BACK OF ONE OR MORE

SCSI DEVICES

Not

Terminated

Internally

25-pin Connector

50-pin Connector

4-22

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Attach the other end of the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the

camera.

SCSI Connector

25-pin Connector

7. (Optional) Later, to disconnect the camera from the computer, shut

down the computer and all external SCSI devices, and then power off

the camera. Then restore the SCSI cables and terminator to the state

they were in before the camera was connected. Do not leave a SCSI

cable with an empty connector dangling from a SCSI chain.

Continue at “Inserting and Removing a PCMCIA Card” later in this

chapter.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

III. Camera Used with a Macintosh PowerBook

or a PC Laptop

Follow the steps below to match your computer system, either a

Macintosh PowerBook (part A) or a PC Laptop (part B).

A. Macintosh PowerBook with No External

SCSI Devices

You can use the camera with a variety of PowerBook models (except do

not use the camera with the model 100). However, the information in this

section may not apply to all PowerBook models.

For this installation you will need to supply an HDI-30-pin to 25-pin

Macintosh PowerBook SCSI adapter cable. Do not use a terminator.

NOTE: This cable is available in two versions; be certain that your cable is no

longer than three feet long, and that you obtain a cable for connecting a

PowerBook computer to a SCSI device, not for connecting a PowerBook com-

puter to a desktop Macintosh computer.

PowerBook SCSI Adapter Cable

HDI-30-pin Connector

25-pin Connector

4-24

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Turn off the Macintosh PowerBook computer.

IMPORTANT: Later when you connect and disconnect the Macintosh

PowerBook computer and the camera on a regular basis, make sure the

computer is off.

2. Connect the AC battery charger/adapter to the camera as described

earlier in this chapter. Although this step is optional, we recommend it

whenever the camera is connected to a computer.

3. Attach the HDI-30-pin connector of your HDI-30-pin to 25-pin SCSI

cable to the HDI-30 port on the back of the Macintosh PowerBook.

Make sure the connector is well seated by pressing it into place firmly.

IMPORTANT: Do not use a terminator.

BACK OF

POWERBOOK

COMPUTER

Camera

SCSI Connector

4. Attach the other end of your HDI-30-pin to 25-pin SCSI cable to the

SCSI connector on the back of the camera.

5. (Optional) Later, to disconnect the camera from the Macintosh com-

puter, shut down the computer and then power off the camera. Then

disconnect the SCSI cable from the camera and from the Macintosh

computer. Do not leave a SCSI cable with an empty connector/

terminator dangling from your Macintosh computer.

Continue at “Inserting and Removing a PCMCIA Card” later in this

chapter.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B. PC (for TWAIN driver)

The camera can be used with an IBM or compatible laptop computer if

you use a PCMCIA-to-SCSI II adapter (such as the Adaptec SlimSCSI used

with EZ-SCSI 4.0 or the New Media Bus Toaster). These adapters include

a PCMCIA card that plugs into the PCMCIA slot in your laptop (not in the

camera). A cable connects this card to the SCSI connector on the camera,

using an adapter if needed at the camera end of the cable. None of this

equipment is provided with the camera.

In this configuration set the SCSI ID on the camera to “PC;” this sets the

camera SCSI ID to 1 and turns on active termination in the camera.

CAUTION: When you finish with the camera in “PC” mode, turn off the com-

puter and camera. If left in “PC” mode, a fully charged battery will be exhausted

in approximately eight hours since the camera can not change to low power

mode when this SCSI setting is active.

4-26

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inserting and Removing a PCMCIA

Card

This section describes how to insert and remove a PCMCIA card. PCMCIA

cards are not supplied with the camera, but are available as optional

equipment. Refer to Chapter 1 and to the read-me files supplied with the

software for additional information on supported cards.

A PCMCIA card can be inserted or removed at any time, except when the

red “Card Busy” light on the camera back is blinking. You can insert or

remove a card while in the field, while connected to the AC battery

charger adapter, while connected to a computer, and/or while the camera

is on or off.

IMPORTANT: When the red Card Busy light is blinking, data is being read from

or written to the PCMCIA card, for example just after you take a picture, or later

when you move data from the camera to a computer. If the card is removed while

the light is blinking, you may lose the current image, and may lose other images

as well.

Inserting a PCMCIA Card

Follow these steps to insert a PCMCIA card. (If a card is currently in-

stalled, there is no need to follow these steps now, although if you are

unfamiliar with the use of this type of card you may wish first to remove

the card as described in the next section, and then to return here to

reinstall the card.)

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Be certain that the red “Card Busy” light is not blinking before you

continue.

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

CARD BUSY light

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

4-28

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. While looking at the back of the camera, open the door on the left

edge of the camera back by inserting a thumb or finger into the

opening and swinging the door away from you.

DELETE

SCSI ID

Insert/remove

PCMCIA card

here.

3. NOTE: As you complete this step, do not be startled when the red

Card Busy light blinks and you hear noise from the camera; this is

normal operation when a PCMCIA card is inserted.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Insert your PCMCIA card (not supplied with the camera), by sliding it

— thin edge first — into the empty slot, and pushing it firmly into

place.

LCD

DELETE

SCSI ID

When properly installed, the end of the PCMCIA release button

should be flush with the edge of the card.

Release button

PCMCIA card

4-30

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Swing the door closed over the PCMCIA card.

NOTE: The camera back LCD (see figure above at the start of step 3) may

show “E6,” a code indicating that the PCMCIA card is not formatted. That is a

normal condition at this point in the preparation of the camera. In a later

section of this chapter you will format the PCMCIA card.

Removing a PCMCIA Card

Follow these steps to remove a PCMCIA card.

1. Be certain that the red “Card Busy” light is not blinking before you

continue.

IMPORTANT: When the red Card Busy light is blinking, data is being read

from or written to the PCMCIA card, for example just after you take a picture,

or later when you move data from the camera to a computer. If the card is

removed while the light is blinking, you may lose the current image, and may

lose other images as well.

2. While looking at the back of the camera, open the door on the left

edge of the camera back by inserting your left thumb or other finger

into the opening and swinging the door away from you.

DELETE

SCSI ID

Remove/insert

PCMCIA card

here.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. CAUTION: As you complete this step, the PCMCIA card is ejected

from the camera; for that reason, keep your hand in front of the door

opening to prevent the fragile card from falling out of the camera. If a

PCMCIA card is dropped, you may destroy it, resulting in the loss of

all of your data on the card.

Firmly press the rectangular button at the top of the opening inside the

door; this action releases the PCMCIA card from its connector and

ejects the card from the camera back.

Press firmly.

4. Remove the card from the camera by grasping it at the top and bottom

with your thumb and forefinger and pulling it completely from the

camera.

5. Swing the door closed over the empty card compartment.

4-32

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the KODAK Driver

In this section you will install the special software driver provided with

the camera. Then you can use the driver to ensure that the camera has the

latest firmware (camera control programming), and to format a PCMCIA

card(s). Once the software is installed, you can use it regularly to move

images and sound files from the camera to your computer by acquiring

them while running your copy of Adobe Photoshop (or other supported

software on a PC), as described in Chapters 6 and 8.

Installing the software is a onetime action; you complete these steps once,

and do not repeat them each time you want to acquire images. The

camera can remain connected to the AC battery charger/adapter and the

computer while you complete these steps.

1. If your computer is not on, turn it on now

2. Locate the Kodak-supplied driver diskettes for the computer system

you will use — either Macintosh or PC.

3. Place the first diskette into the internal drive of your computer.

4. Read the contents of the read-me file — it contains the latest informa-

tion on the camera and software driver.

5. Follow the instructions below to install the driver for either a

Macintosh computer or PC.

Macintosh: Double-click on the installer icon and follow the direc-

tions you find there for installing the camera software.

PC:

A. Choose R^UNfrom START (or the FILE menu if appropriate).

B. Type A:\S^ETUP(type B:\SETUP if the diskette is in drive B) in the

command line.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C. Install the software by following all instructions as they appear.

NOTES ON TWAIN FOR THE PC: TWAIN is a set of written specifications

developed by a consortium of vendors, that when implemented in software

allows you to acquire data from a peripheral (such as a digital camera or film

scanner) directly into your software application (such as image-editing

software) without leaving the application. Software that incorporates the

specifications is called “TWAIN-compliant.” TWAIN-compliant software

applications should be able to obtain image data from a TWAIN-compliant

source of data, such as the KODAK Driver described in this chapter.

You can install and use the TWAIN-compliant driver for use with ASPI

(Advanced SCSI Programming Interface) host adapter card such as those

available from Adaptec, Inc. running EZ-SCSI 4.0 or later.

This KODAK Driver is intended for use with applications that are ASPI

compliant for Windows, and not for use with applications that are ASPI

compliant for other operating platforms.

With an ASPI compliant SCSI host adapter card, you must install the Win-

dows ASPI files that accompany it. The KODAK Driver for use with ASPI

compliant host adapter cards will not work properly unless these files have

been installed.

The process described in this section automatically:

Creates a subdirectory named “TWAIN” in the Windows directory. (If

you have other TWAIN-compliant devices this subdirectory may already

exist; if so, a new one is not created.)

Creates (if one does not already exist), a “DCS4xx” subdirectory within

the “TWAIN” directory to hold files for the camera.

Places a set of files within the “DCS4xx” subdirectory.

Overwrites any existing DCS drivers already in the directory. This version

of the driver processes images for other Kodak professional cameras

(except for the DCS 100 and 200).

6. DCS 460 Only

A. Locate the diskette for your computer system (Macintosh or

TWAIN-PC) with the calibration (CAL) file for your camera.

4-34

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B. Make a backup of the calibration diskette; you cannot obtain

images from the camera without the CAL file.

C. Follow the appropriate part of this step for your computer system.

Macintosh: Copy the calibration file (its name ends with the

characters “.CAL”) into the folder containing your Photoshop

plug-ins (it is probably named P^LUG-INS).

TWAIN (PC): Run the SETUP program to install the calibration

file.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessing the Camera from the

Driver

Repeat the steps below each time you want to access the KODAK Driver

for Adobe Photoshop software or for supported TWAIN-compliant PC

applications.

1. If the camera and your computer are not connected, turn both off and

connect them now by following the directions in “Making the SCSI

Connection” earlier in this chapter.

2. Connect the AC battery charger/adapter to the camera as described

earlier in this chapter. Although this step is optional, we recommend it

whenever the camera is connected to a computer.

3. If your computer is on, turn it off.

4. Turn on the camera by sliding the Nikon N90s power switch to ON.

5. Wake the camera by lightly pressing the shutter release button.

6. Turn on the computer.

7. Run Adobe Photoshop. (The examples throughout this manual use

Photoshop — available for both the Macintosh and PC platforms.)

NOTE: You should ensure that the gamma for your monitor is calibrated properly

per instructions accompanying Adobe Photoshop; if you do not, images may be

consistently too light or too dark.

Special Instructions for TWAIN-compliant

Software

All TWAIN-compliant software does not provide access to TWAIN drivers

in the same way. As a result, for demonstration purposes this section

provides one example using the KODAK Driver with Adobe Photoshop.

4-36

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you use other supported software, refer to its documentation to deter-

mine if it is TWAIN-compliant, and if it is, how it provides access to

TWAIN drivers.

As you use a variety of TWAIN-compliant software, it may be helpful to

know how the TWAIN specifications expect applications to perform. The

specifications provide for a consistent software interface by encouraging

software developers to include two specific commands — S^ELECTSOURCE

and ACQUIRE — on the FILE menu. The specification intends that users

should first choose S^ELECTSOURCE which should display a list of TWAIN-

compliant device drivers installed on the system. After the user selects a

driver from the list, he/she should be returned to the application. The user

should then choose A^CQUIREwhich should open access to the device and

allow the user to obtain image data.

IMPORTANT: Some image editing software takes all available RAM by default at

start-up. The TWAIN driver will not work if this occurs. To avoid the problem, set

the memory preference for your application (often found on the F^ILEmenu) so that

there is at least one megabyte of free RAM.

Once you have installed the TWAIN driver as described earlier in this

chapter, and are running Photoshop, you access the driver by following

these steps.

1. Choose SELECT TWAIN SOURCE on the IMPORT submenu on the Adobe

Photoshop F^ILEmenu; the SELECT SOURCE dialog box appears. (For

earlier supported versions of Photoshop choose S^ELECTTWAIN SOURCE

on the ACQUIRE submenu on the Adobe Photoshop FILE menu.)

2. Click the name of the camera driver.

3. Click S^ELECT; you are returned to Photoshop.

NOTE: The choice is maintained in a preference file for the TWAIN-compli-

ant driver; you do not need to repeat steps 1 through 3 each time you use the

driver.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Final Steps to the Driver Window

1. Follow the appropriate step below.

MACINTOSH: Pull down the Adobe Photoshop 4.0 File menu and

choose K^ODAKDCS 400/EOS•DCS/NC2000 from the IMPORT submenu.

(For earlier supported versions of Photoshop, choose the driver from

the A^CQUIREsubmenu of the FILE menu.)

TWAIN (PC): Choose TWAIN on the F^ILEmenu (TWAIN ACQUIRE in

earlier supported versions of Photoshop).

4-38

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Wait as the driver image window appears.

NOTES: Instead of the driver image window above you may see a message

that the camera was not found. If you do, follow the troubleshooting sugges-

tions in the message. Additional information regarding this and other mes-

sages appears in the “Messages” section of the Chapter 8.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Updating Camera Firmware

The camera incorporates nonvolatile memory that contains controls —

called firmware — for most features of the camera. You can update that

firmware yourself, which means you can keep the camera up-to-date as

changes are made to the firmware. (Refer to the appendix “Updating Your

KODAK Software Driver,” for additional information.) You can also

perform some troubleshooting without sending the camera to a service

center, as described in the camera troubleshooting section of this manual.

By following the steps below to update camera firmware the first time you

use the driver, you will ensure that the camera contains the most current

version of the firmware. You do not need to update camera firmware each

time you use the driver.

To complete these steps, the camera must be connected to your computer

as described earlier in this chapter. We also assume that Adobe

Photoshop (or other supported TWAIN-compliant application on a PC) is

currently running on your computer, and that you have accessed the

driver image window by choosing the driver as described earlier in this

chapter.

4-40

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Click the camera control icon of the driver image window. You see

the dialog box below.

2. Click the LOAD CAMERA FIRMWARE button.

NOTE: If you see a message indicating that the firmware update failed and

specifying the name of a missing “BIN” file, be certain that you have installed

the software as described earlier in this chapter.

3. Wait while firmware is copied to the camera.

NOTE: You may see a message asking you to use the AC battery charger/

adapter and to wait for several minutes; if you do see this message, follow the

instructions in the message and wait (to allow the battery to charge) before

clicking the L^OADCAMERA FIRMWARE button again.

4. Click DONE to close the CAMERA CONTROL dialog box.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Formatting a PCMCIA Card

This section describes how to format a PCMCIA card, an action you may

need to take now as you start to use the camera, and may need to repeat

later on an occasional basis when you want to format another card, or to

reformat a card you have been using with the camera.

To complete these steps, the camera must be connected to your computer

as described earlier in this chapter. We also assume that a supported

application is currently running on your computer, and that you have

accessed the driver image window by choosing the driver as described

earlier in this chapter.

A PCMCIA card used for image storage must be (DOS) formatted using the

camera with the supplied driver as described in this section.

4-42

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Click the camera control icon of the driver image window. You see

the C^AMERACONTROL dialog box.

2. IMPORTANT: As you complete this step, keep in mind that this

operation will erase all existing data on the PCMCIA card.

Click the F^ORMATbutton, and click the response you want on the

confirmation box that appears.

3. Wait as the software formats the card. (If the operation fails, try

formatting one more time.)

4. If you have more than one card to format, you can remove the current

card as described earlier in this chapter, insert another, and click the

F^ORMATbutton again to format the new card. You can also use this

operation to reformat a card that you have been using with the

camera.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Click DONE to close the dialog box.

6. Click D^ONEto leave the driver image window.

7. Quit the application.

4-44

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quitting — Disconnecting the Camera

from the Computer

Complete these steps when you have completed your work with the

camera and the computer.

1. If Photoshop or other supported application is running, quit that

application now.

2. Turn off the camera by sliding the Nikon N90s power switch to off.

3. Turn off your computer.

4. Turn off other SCSI devices if present.

5. (Optional) Disconnect the camera from the computer.

CAUTION: Do not disconnect the camera from the computer while the

driver image window is open, or even while the computer is on. Doing

so may result in the loss of data from the PCMCIA card in the camera or

from the hard disk in your computer. Instead, turn off all equipment in

the order described above before disconnecting the camera.

Your camera is now ready to take pictures as described in Chapter 5.

Preparing the Camera and the Computer

4-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_{. . . . . . .}5_{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .}

Using the Camera

Follow the steps in this chapter to take pictures with the camera. As you

do, you can use the camera in a variety of settings, including:

Indoors while connected to the AC battery charger/adapter. (If you are

working indoors, we recommend that you keep the camera connected

to the adapter.)

Indoors while connected to a computer (with or without the adapter).

In the field with the camera operating from its battery without being

connected to a computer or to the adapter.

Using the Camera

5-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Readying the Nikon N90s Camera

1. If a formatted PCMCIA card is not in the camera, insert one now.

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 4 for information on formatting, inserting, and

removing PCMCIA cards. If the camera back LCD shows “E6” the card has not

been formatted; you must format it before you can continue.

Camera back LCD

DELETE

SCSI ID

Insert/remove

PCMCIA card

here.

2. Select either step A or B below depending on the environment in

which you will use the camera.

A. Indoors. Connect the camera to the AC battery charger/adapter as

described in Chapter 4; leave it connected while you operate the

camera. The camera will be ready for operation almost immedi-

ately. However, if you are beginning with a dead battery, and

notice unusual behavior, you may need to wait for approximately

three minutes before using the camera.

NOTE: The adapter supplies enough power to support operation of the

camera as well as to continue charging the camera battery. Once the

battery is fully charged, the AC battery charger/adapter automatically

switches to a slow trickle charge.

5-2

Using the Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B. In the field without the AC battery charger/adapter. Before you go

into the field, you should charge the battery fully as described in

Chapter 4. Charging the battery for two hours will ensure the most

images per charge.

3. Turn on the camera by sliding the Nikon N90s power switch to ON.

The camera liquid crystal display (LCD) panel displays a variety of

current settings.

NOTES: There is no separate on/off switch on the camera back.

CUSTOM

The camera top LCD will continuously display the

signal. The

signal appears whenever the camera back is communicating with the camera,

for example directly after shooting.

The

signal, will always show that the Nikon N90s camera batteries

are good, even though there are no batteries in the Nikon N90s camera, and

even when the battery in the camera back is weak. This indicator should be

ignored.

Power switch

Shutter release button

MODE

DRIVE

OFF

ISO

Using the Camera

5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Select any of the three automatic film advance modes — single frame

shooting (S), continuous low-speed shooting (L), or high-speed shoot-

ing (H). To do so, hold down the film advance mode (DRIVE) button

while rotating the command input control dial.

NOTE: The L and H settings provide essentially the same shooting rate.

Film advance mode

MODE

DRIVE

OFF

ISO

Film advance mode button

Command input control dial

5. Choose other settings as desired, with the exceptions noted below:

Multiple exposure mode is not supported. Only the first exposure

will be recorded.

You will not be able to shoot when the camera is in S focus

(Single Servo AF with Focus-Priority), if the camera cannot focus.

5-4

Using the Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If this occurs, choose another focus mode, or take some other

action — for example shoot from a different position — which

will allow focusing to occur.

You will not be able to shoot if you have set the exposure-mode

to one of the two programmed auto exposure modes offered

(either P or Ps), unless you have set the lens to its smallest aper-

ture.

6. Lightly press the shutter release button to awaken the camera. The

camera LCD panel and the viewfinder LCD display data. The camera

is ready.

NOTE: To conserve battery power, the camera and camera back automati-

cally turn off after approximately five seconds. This means the camera is no

longer in a ready state. If you do not see the current shutter speed and

aperture on the Nikon N90s camera LCD panel and in the viewfinder LCD,

you can immediately reawaken the camera by lightly pressing the shutter

release button again.

Shutter speed

Aperture

MODE

DRIVE

OFF

ISO

Using the Camera

5-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. Notice that the camera back LCD displays several graphics. (If the AC

battery charger/adapter is not attached, you need to lightly press the

shutter release to wake the camera and see these data on that LCD.)

The graphics display:

The amount of charge in the battery.

The number of frames remaining on the PCMCIA card. For

example the illustration below indicates that there is still room for

64 additional images on the card.

An oval that serves several purposes, including indicating the

amount of the card filled with images. (An empty oval indicates

that the PCMCIA card is empty.)

LCD GRAPHICS

Frames remaining

Battery indicator

8. With the camera awake, check the battery indicator on the LCD on

the camera back (not the Nikon N90s camera LCD).

If the segments are lighting in turn from bottom to top, the battery

is being charged by the attached AC battery charger/adapter; you

can operate the camera normally in this state.

5-6

Using the Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Without the AC battery charger/adapter, if the indicator shows

that the battery is low, recharge it or operate the camera from the

AC battery charger/adapter.

⁄

Full battery

3 full Low battery

Blinks when battery exhausted

9. Set the ISO on the camera; the supported range is listed in the Specifi-

cations appendix.

In selecting an exposure setting, if more than one ISO setting is

available for your camera model, begin with lower exposure index

settings; reserve the use of higher speeds only for situations requiring

their use. Higher speeds may result in lower-quality images than

lower speeds (you may notice grain or snow in the image). For this

reason, as with film, you may want to use a flash and a lower ISO

setting.

NOTE: If you set the ISO outside the supported value, you can take one

picture (with unpredictable results), but then the camera back resets the ISO

as follows: if the ISO was set above the top of range, it will be reset to the

top; if the ISO was set below the bottom of the range, it will be reset to the

bottom. “ISO” blinks on the camera back LCD until you take another picture

or until the camera sleeps; the new ISO is displayed on the camera top LCD if

the Nikon N90s ISO button is pressed.

Blinking

ISO

Using the Camera

5-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turning Off the Camera

You turn off the camera by sliding the Nikon N90s camera power switch

to OFF.

When the camera is on but not awake (the LCD on the camera back is

off), the drain on the battery is very minimal as the camera waits in a sleep

state for your next action. Therefore, in normal usage of the camera

during a shooting session with or without the AC battery charger/adapter,

it is not necessary to continually turn the camera off then on again. In

either case, when you are finished with a shooting session, you should

turn off the camera by sliding the Nikon N90s camera power switch to

OFF.

Taking Pictures

1. Turn on the camera, and wake it by lightly pressing the shutter release

button.

2. Frame the scene within the inner rectangle of the focusing screen. The

focusing screen in the camera has been modified and indicates a

reduced view of the scene to match the size of the picture that will be

recorded on the imager. (An illustration of the focusing screen appears

in the “Specifications” appendix.)

3. Focus.

4. Press the shutter release to take a picture.

5-8

Using the Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Set the film advance mode for continuous shooting (either L or H

mode), and take additional pictures by keeping the shutter release

depressed.

NOTE: The camera is ready for the first shot within 0.25 second after the

shutter release is depressed, and subsequent images will be recorded depend-

ing on camera model (refer to the Specifications appendix) and on camera

model and the type of PCMCIA card being used).

Reading the Frames Remaining Indicator and

the Frame Counter

Two numbering systems provide different information about your pictures.

Frames Remaining

Each time you take a picture, the number on the camera back LCD

decreases by one indicating the number of additional pictures that can be

stored on the PCMCIA card currently in the camera.

Frames remaining

Using the Camera

5-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The oval at the right of the LCD indicates the amount of the PCMCIA card

filled with images. As more pictures are taken, subsequent sectors of this

graphic appear.

Card

empty

Card up to

1/6 filled

Card filled

(indicator flashes)

Frame Counter

A separate numbering system is provided by the Nikon N90s camera. Its

frame counter appears in brackets near the right edge in the viewfinder

indication area and on the Nikon N90s LCD on top of the camera. These

numbers go up by one as each picture is taken. After reaching number 99,

the image reference numbers cycle back to 1, 2, etc.

This frame counter is displayed with each image in the software driver

image window.

The camera is ready for shooting as long as you see a frame counter in the

viewfinder and on the Nikon N90s LCD on top of the camera. If no value

is displayed, the camera is not ready — perhaps the battery is low or the

card is full. Additionally, the frame counter disappears for several seconds

while image data are moved from memory in the camera to the PCMCIA

card. When the frame counter reappears, the camera is ready for shooting.

5-10

Using the Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deleting Pictures (Optional)

This section describes how you can delete one or more of the most recent

pictures from the PCMCIA card. This feature is useful if your card is full

and you need to make room for more pictures or if you know that you

have just taken an unsatisfactory picture and want to delete it. (As ex-

plained in later chapters, you can also delete pictures with the supplied

software driver.)

1. If it is not on, turn on the camera by sliding the Nikon N90s power

switch to ON.

2. Wake the camera by lightly pressing the shutter release button.

NOTE: After several seconds of inactivity, the camera automatically turns off.

As you complete these steps you may need to begin again at this step.

Using the Camera

5-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Locate the indented button on the back of the camera labeled

“DELETE.”

Frames remaining

Indicates delete mode

Disk indicator

DELETE button

DEL

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

5-12

Using the Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Press this DELETE button once with your fingertip or other blunt

object; this action wakes delete mode. The characters “DEL” appear

on the camera back LCD.

5. While “DEL” still appears on the LCD, press the DELETE button again.

The most current image — based on image date and time — is

deleted. The red Card Busy light will flicker, indicating that the image

is being deleted from the PCMCIA card.

6. (Optional) Press the DELETE button again — repeatedly if you wish —

to delete another picture(s).

NOTES: As each image is deleted the frames remaining indicator on the camera

back increases by one, indicating that there is now room for one additional image

on the PCMCIA card. The frame counter in the viewfinder does not change as a

result of deleting an image.

Only image files are deleted. Sound files (described just below), or other files that

may be on the disk are not deleted.

Use this feature with care since it is possible that you may unknowingly delete the

“wrong” image. This can occur since the camera deletes the image with the most

current date and time. Perhaps you have used the PCMCIA card to take pictures,

and then the camera or PCMCIA card has been used by another photographer. If

you now delete an image, you will delete images from the other photographer

since they have the most current date and time stamp.

If you inadvertently delete images, an emergency procedure provides an opportu-

nity for you to recover images if you do so before taking any additional pictures.

Refer to the explanation of the R^ECOVERbutton in Chapter 8.

Additionally, since the PCMCIA card is DOS formatted, if you have an IBM PC or

compatible computer with a PCMCIA card reader and disk utility software with

file recovery features, you may be able to recover image and sound files while

working with that utility software.

Using the Camera

5-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recording Sound (Optional)

You can record sound on the PCMCIA card via a microphone built into

the camera by following these steps.

1. Turn on and wake the camera.

2. Hold the camera back approximately six inches (15 cm) from your

mouth.

3. Press and hold the record button.

Microphone

Record button

DELETE

CARD BUSY

SCSI ID

4. Speak into the microphone.

5. Release the record button; the red Card Busy light blinks as the data

are recorded on the PCMCIA card.

The center dot of the disk icon on the camera back LCD comes on when

the recording button is pressed and segments of the disk icon bounce up

5-14

Using the Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

and back, serving as a level meter (similar to the levels commonly dis-

played on audio equipment like tape decks). The bouncing segments

provide feedback, a visual indication that sound is being recorded. The

best quality recording should occur when 4-5 segments are on.

No sound

Maximum

The camera cannot play the recorded sound; instead, you will need to use

your computer as described in Chapter 7. Chapter 8 contains additional

reference material about recorded sound files.

Turning off the Camera

If you are done with the camera, turn it off by sliding the Nikon camera

power switch to OFF.

Using the Camera

5-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating Differences with the Nikon

N90s Camera

There are differences between normal operation of the Nikon N90s

camera and its operation as part of the camera system. For that reason we

provide a list of the differences, and other considerations, as you begin to

work with the camera system.

NOTE: We assume that you are familiar with the operation of the Nikon N90s

camera; refer to the instruction manual for the Nikon N90s supplied with the

camera system if needed.

You use the camera back incorporating a Kodak imager instead of the

Nikon N90s camera back for film. The camera back comes attached

to the Nikon camera body, and should not be separated except to

clean a dirty imager as described in Chapter 7.

You use no film.

Nikon film camera backs cannot be used.

You must use an ISO setting as listed in the Specifications appendix.

The amount of “noise” (defects) in an image increases linearly with

time; there is a slow progression of added noise as exposure time

increases. Similarly, a higher ISO (if supported by your camera

model — refer to the Specifications appendix), results in more noise

than a lower ISO, again in a linear progression. As a result, work with

shorter exposure times and lower ISO setting if possible, and avoid

long exposures. Exposures of more than 4–5 seconds (and occasion-

ally more than ¹⁄2 second) can produce noise in the image.

Multiple-exposure mode is not supported. Only the first exposure will

be recorded.

The focusing screen in the camera has been modified and indicates a

reduced view of the scene to match the size of the picture that will be

recorded on the imager. The screen is illustrated in the “Specifica-

tions” appendix.

5-16

Using the Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Nikon Data Link System is not supported. The camera provides

access to similar data through the image information window pro-

vided on the driver image window.

You will not be able to shoot when the camera is in S focus mode

(Single Servo AF with Focus-Priority) if the camera cannot focus.

Choose another focus mode, or take some other action — for example

shoot from a different position — which will allow focusing to occur.

Note: This is normal operation of the Nikon N90s; it is included here since it

is a potential problem to avoid.

If you have set the exposure-mode to one of the two programmed

auto exposure modes offered (either P or Ps), be certain that you set

the lens to its smallest aperture.

Note: This is normal operation of the Nikon N90s; it is included here since it

is a potential problem to avoid.

When using the bulb setting, the camera back will obtain an image

after 30 seconds, even if the shutter is open for a longer period of

time.

The film loading and the film advance and rewind indications do not

appear in the Nikon N90s camera LCD.

For information on using a flash, refer to the section “Using a Flash” in

Chapter 7.

Lenses behave differently when used with the Nikon N90s. The exact

details, including an illustration, appear in the “Specifications”

appendix.

Using the Camera

5-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_{. . . . . . .}6_{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .}

Tutorial — Accessing Camera

Images

This chapter is a tutorial that describes how to use the KODAK driver with

your camera connected to your computer. When the camera is connected

to your computer, you can work with images you have taken earlier with

the camera while not connected to the computer, or you can take new

pictures. Both usages (working with images already on a PCMCIA card

and taking new images) are described in this chapter.

While the camera and the computer are connected, you use the supplied

KODAK software driver to:

Access, view, and select images from your camera.

Acquire images or contact sheets from the camera into Adobe

Photoshop. This means that individual image files from your PCMCIA

Accessing Camera Images

6-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

card are opened into separate windows in Adobe Photoshop. Once

acquired you can use all Photoshop features to edit the images and

save them in the variety of file formats available in Photoshop.

IMPORTANT: Throughout this chapter we refer to “Photoshop.” This single

reference refers to both the Macintosh and PC versions of Photoshop 4.0, and

also to other supported PC TWAIN-compliant image-editing software.

Rotate, crop, color balance, name, and annotate images.

Copy images from the PCMCIA card in your camera to folders (sub-

directories) on your computer hard disk; these images are called

archive images. You can then use the driver to access and manipulate

archive images from a folder just as you can do with images directly

from a PCMCIA card.

Use the software to view unrecorded test shots you make with the

connected camera, and then begin recording images when all settings

meet your requirements for the image.

Format PCMCIA cards and load firmware into the camera.

Delete image and sound files.

Play recorded sound files.

NOTES: This chapter assumes that you have installed the KODAK driver and that

you know how to connect the camera to your computer. Refer to chapter 4 for

information if needed.

The settings you choose while in the driver image window are maintained

automatically from session to session.

You should ensure that the gamma for your monitor is calibrated properly per

instructions accompanying Adobe Photoshop; if it is not, images may be consis-

tently too light or too dark.

6-2

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Working with Images Already on a

PCMCIA Card

This section is a tutorial on how you might work at the computer with

images you have previously taken with the camera.

NOTE: A later part of this tutorial describes how you can use the camera while

connected to a computer (perhaps in a studio setting) to take new pictures;

however, all features described in this section also apply to the later section, so

we encourage you to work through both sections.

Accessing the Camera from the Driver

Repeat the steps below each time you want to access the camera from

your computer.

1. Follow the steps described in chapter 4 to connect the AC battery

charger/adapter to the camera, to connect the camera to your com-

puter, and to ensure that both are on.

NOTE: Although using the AC battery charger/adapter is optional, we

recommend it whenever the camera is connected to a computer.

2. If one is not present, insert your PCMCIA card with camera images

into the camera.

NOTES: As you work with the camera and the computer, you can insert and

remove cards at any point in the process; however, do not remove a PCMCIA

card while the red Card Busy light on the camera back is blinking. If you do,

you may lose all data on the card.

Use extreme care with PCMCIA cards, as they are easily damaged. If

dropped, you may destroy the PCMCIA card resulting in the loss of all of your

data on the card.

3. Run Adobe Photoshop.

Accessing Camera Images

6-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Choose KODAK DCS 400/EOS•DCS/NC2000 from the IMPORT submenu

of the Adobe Photoshop 4.0 F^ILEmenu.

NOTES: For earlier supported versions of Photoshop, choose the driver from

the A^CQUIREsubmenu of the FILE menu.

O^PENfrom the FILE menu will not acquire images from the camera.

5. Wait as the driver image window appears. If you see a message that

the camera was not found, or that the calibration file cannot be found,

refer to the “Messages” section of chapter 8.

The driver can display images from a variety of supported Kodak

camera types. This means that you can use the same PCMCIA card

with different supported Kodak cameras and view all of the images

with the same driver.

KEY TO FIGURE: All driver features are identified by letter in the following figure. Many of

these features are introduced in this chapter, but not explained in detail; however, full

explanations of all features appear in order by these letters in chapter 8.

A. Source Menu

N. Acquire Button

B. View Menu

O. Copy To Button

C. Active Photoshop Menus

D. Acquire As Menu

E. Take Picture Icon

F. Camera Control Icon

G. Preferences Icon

P. Delete Button

Q. Done Button

R. Annotation Area

S. Image Information Window

T. Navigation Bar

H. Rename Images Icon

I. Rotate Clockwise/Counterclockwise Icons

J. Crop Icon

U. Select All Icon

V. Number of Images Selected

W. X-Y Cursor Location

X. RGB Values at the Cursor Location

Y. Thumbnail/Preview Size Menu

K. Lighting Menu

L. Click-Balance Tool

M. Sound Menu

6-4

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driver Image Window (Macintosh and TWAIN):

A B

Edit

Viewing/Selecting an Image from the Camera

with the Driver

In this section we start by assuming that you want to select a single image

to acquire into Photoshop. You begin your work session by making

choices across the top of the driver image window from left to right.

Accessing Camera Images

6-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. If it is not already selected, choose CAMERA from the SOURCE menu to

work with images from a connected camera.

FOLDER and CHOOSE FOLDER allow you to work with images that you

have previously copied from the camera to a folder (sub-directory) on

your computer hard drive (as explained later in this chapter).

2. If it is not already selected, choose CONTACT SHEET from the VIEW menu.

This displays thumbnails — each a subsample of data from the full

image — of all images from the source (here a PCMCIA card in the

camera). The thumbnails are displayed in the image area of the driver

image window, sorted in order by date and time, with the oldest

image displayed first.

PREVIEW allows you to view larger versions of each image, while TEST

SHOT works with a single, unsaved image which is always the most

recent picture you take with the camera after making this choice.

6-6

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. If it is not already selected, choose PHOTO from the ACQUIRE AS menu.

This specifies that, when you acquire images into Photoshop, each

image will be acquired into a separate window.

CONTACT SHEET allows you to acquire a contact sheet of selected

images instead of separate windows each with a single image. As with

non-digital photography, a contact sheet consists of rows of thumb-

nails.

4. Scroll if needed, using the scroll bar, until the image you want to

acquire appears in the image area.

You can also scroll using the navigation bar in the lower left corner of

the screen as described later in this chapter.

5. If it is difficult to distinguish between the images, choose a larger

image size from the Thumbnail/Preview size menu in the lower right

corner of the window.

6. Click once directly on the image you want to acquire; a color border

appears around the image indicating that you have selected it.

Accessing Camera Images

6-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acquiring One Image from the Camera

You are now ready to acquire an image into Photoshop. Acquiring an

image copies its image data from the PCMCIA card into Photoshop, where

the acquired image opens into a Photoshop window. The original image

is unchanged by the process.

1. With an image selected, click the A^CQUIREbutton. (You can also

double-click the image as an alternate to the two-step process of

selecting one image and then clicking the A^CQUIREbutton.)

2. Wait as a progress box appears; you remain in the driver as the image

opens into a Photoshop window behind the driver image window.

(You can cancel acquiring by clicking the C^ANCELbutton in the

progress box.)

3. (Optional) Click the D^ONEbutton to close the driver image window.

4. (Optional) Edit the acquired image using Photoshop features. Save the

image to your computer hard disk (you cannot save it back to the

PCMCIA card in the camera) in the file format of your choice.

IMPORTANT: If you have not made any changes to the acquired image while

in Photoshop, and you click the close box of the acquired image window or

choose C^LOSEfrom the Photoshop FILE menu or quit Photoshop, the window

will close without asking you if you want to save it. Therefore, be sure you

save any acquired images you do not want to lose before closing their

windows or quitting Photoshop.

6-8

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acquiring Multiple Images or a Contact Sheet

In the previous section you acquired a single image into Photoshop. In

this section you will acquire multiple images (or a contact sheet of those

images) simultaneously.

1. If you closed the driver image window, access it again.

2. Select multiple images using any of the following techniques.

Click one image; then if you are working on a Macintosh, shift-

click (hold down the shift key while you click additional images)

or if you are on a PC, control-click, to add or subtract from the

selected image.

Drag the mouse over adjacent thumbnails.

Click the All button on the driver image window.

Choose ALL from the SELECT pulldown menu.

3. (Optional) Choose C^ONTACTSHEET from the ACQUIRE AS menu; you are

now set to acquire all selected images as a contact sheet rather than

as single images in separate windows.

NOTE: If you choose CONTACT SHEET from the ACQUIRE AS menu, you see the

Acquire Contact Sheet dialog; click OK to accept the default values, or refer

to chapter 8 for additional details of choices on this dialog.

4. Click the ACQUIRE button. If the setting in step 3 is CONTACT SHEET, one

or more Photoshop windows opens behind the driver, with thumb-

Accessing Camera Images

6-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nails of the subset of selected images, as illustrated below after

printing the file; however, if the setting in step 3 is P^HOTO, each image

is acquired into a separate Photoshop window.

IMPORTANT: If you have not made any changes to the acquired image while

in Photoshop, and you click the close box of the acquired image window or

choose C^LOSEfrom the Photoshop FILE menu or quit Photoshop, the window

will close without asking you if you want to save it. Therefore, be sure you

save any acquired images you do not want to lose before closing their

windows or quitting Photoshop.

6-10

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rotate, Rename, and Annotate Images

1. Suppose that one or more images is not displayed in the proper

rotation.

A. Select the image or images not shown in the proper rotation.

B. Click the desired rotation icon; the image or images rotate 90

degrees in the chosen direction for each click on the icon.

2. Suppose that the images on the PCMCIA card are in groups from

several different photo assignments, and that you want to name them

appropriately. (By default the driver assigns names, but they may not

be optimum for your purposes.)

NOTE: The new names are only retained for images that you are about to

acquire or archive in this work session, or for images you have previously

archived. (Acquiring and archiving are both explained later in this chapter.)

The new names are not written to the PCMCIA card.

A. Select the image or images that you want to rename; if you select

multiple images they are renamed as a group.

B. Click the rename icon.

C. Change the values in the RENAME dialog box that appears. Type a

name into the N^AMEarea; it becomes the first portion of the image

name for all selected images. If more than one image is selected,

the values in the S^EQUENCENUMBER area are appended to the end of

the name. Change the S^EQUENCENUMBER values as desired. An

E^XAMPLEappears in the box illustrating how images will be re-

Accessing Camera Images

6-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

named based on the data in the text boxes. Note that the “.TIF”

suffix is automatically added to the file name: do not type the

period or “TIF” in the N^AMEarea.

D. Click the RENAME button; the driver renames all selected images,

and returns you to the driver image window.

3. (Optional) Annotate an image. Click a single image and then type

descriptive material in the annotation window; edit as needed, then

click outside the annotation window (or press Enter) to leave the

annotation window.

The data in the image information window is displayed automatically

by the driver.

The number of characters in the annotation window plus the number

of characters in the image information window must total 255 or less.

Some cameras display more lines in the image information window

than others; for this reason, with some cameras you may not be able

to fill the annotation window with your text. However, you can delete

some lines from the image information window by clicking on the line

(to select the entire line), and pressing the delete key on the keyboard.

This works to delete all lines except for these image information lines:

Camera; Serial #; Width; Height; Date; and Time.

6-12

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When an image is acquired, text from both areas is also acquired, and

is placed in the Photoshop caption area.

Annotation

Window

Image

Information

Window

Accessing Camera Images

6-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigating Through Images

As described earlier in the chapter, you can scroll through images by

using the scroll bar at the right of the image area.

In addition, the driver provides a navigation bar with four control icons

and a center edit area in which you enter an image number to “go to” that

image.

First

Previous Go To

Last

The four icons mean, from left to right, navigate to the: first image, previ-

ous image, next image, and last image. Typing a number into the “go to”

edit box in the middle of the navigation bar and pressing the Return key

moves you to that numbered image.

Navigating through a Contact Sheet

When viewing images in CONTACT SHEET, as you have been in this chapter,

clicking icons in the navigation bar produces different results depending

on the number of images selected.

One or No Images Selected

1. If more than one image is selected, deselect them now, and select a

single image in the middle of the contact sheet.

2. Click the “first” icon; the first of all of your images is selected.

3. Click the “next” icon several times; the selected image changes,

moving consecutively to the “next” image with each click.

6-14

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Click the “previous” icon several times; the selected image changes,

moving consecutively to the “previous” image with each click.

5. Click the “last” icon; the last of all of your images is selected.

More than One Image Selected

Suppose that you have 30 consecutively numbered images on the PCM-

CIA card, and that you have selected images 5, 10, and 20 while in

C^ONTACTSHEET view. Now if you click one of these four icons, all of the

three selected images are deselected and a single image is selected as

follows. If you click the “first” icon, image 1 is selected. If you click the

“previous” icon, image 4 is selected. If you click the “next” icon, image

21 is selected. If you click the “last” icon, image 30 is selected.

Preview

The PREVIEW option of the VIEW menu presents an enlargement of an image

on the screen.

1. Select a single image. (In the next section of this chapter, you will

work in P^REVIEWwith multiple selected images.)

2. Choose Preview from the View menu.

Accessing Camera Images

6-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The screen changes, and a single enlargement of the selected image

fills the image area on the screen.

Applying Color Balance to Images

This section describes how to color balance images, and applies only to

color images, not to images taken with monochrome camera models. The

section is divided into two parts; the first describes the process for work-

ing with a single image, and the second describes how to work with

multiple selected images at the same time.

Color balancing does not change an image at its source. Instead the color

balance settings you establish are saved with the original image and are

applied to that image when the image is acquired into Photoshop (and

when the image is displayed by the driver).

6-16

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Color balance choices are contained in two separate features — the

lighting menu and the click-balance tool — both of which are described

below. Lighting can be set with either. However, lighting choices are

mutually exclusive; you cannot apply one type of lighting and then refine

it with another. Instead, each time you apply any color balancing, your

previous choice is lost, and only the current lighting setting is applied.

Click-balance is always the preferred method of applying color balance to

images.

Applying Color Balance to a Single Image

1. If you are not in the driver image window, return there now.

2. Click the image to be color balanced.

3. Choose P^REVIEWfrom the VIEW menu; you see a single large version of

the image. (Color balancing in P^REVIEWinstead of CONTACT SHEET is

preferred because the effect of color balance adjustments will be more

readily evident.)

4. (Optional) Choose a larger image size from the Thumbnail/Preview

size menu in the lower right corner of the window. This allows you to

work with a blowup of the image.

Accessing Camera Images

6-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Color balance the image using either method A (lighting menu) or

method B (click-balance Tool) that follows.

Method A: Lighting Menu

The lighting menu provides a simple, direct method of quickly applying

one of several lighting choices to your image. Then later, once the image

has been acquired, you can refine it if needed in Photoshop.

1. Select an option from the lighting menu that corresponds to the

original lighting conditions under which you took the images. The

change is applied and is immediately visible on the image.

2. Acquire the image as described earlier in this chapter.

Method B: Click-Balance Tool

Unlike the lighting menu which provides distinct choices to match

lighting conditions under which the image was made, the click-balance

tool provides a more refined method of color balancing, and is always the

preferred method of applying color balancing to images.

1. To activate the click-balance tool, first click its checkbox “on” (an X

appears in the checkbox to the left of this option when on).

Checkbox

6-18

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Move the cursor over the image, the cursor changes to a special click-

balance eyedropper cursor.

3. Click the point of the eyedropper on a white or light gray area (an

area that is not overexposed) of the image to be corrected, or click a

point that should be white or light gray where each of the red (R),

green (G), and blue (B) color values displayed below the image are as

high as possible, but lower than 255. The change is applied and is

immediately visible on the image.

NOTES: When you click, you may see the message that one of the colors is

saturated. As prompted, click another point.

If there is no white or light gray area in the image, follow the steps in the next

section to take a photograph of a neutral gray or white card and use it for

color balancing.

4. (Optional) If the correction was not satisfactory, click the eyedropper

(not the checkbox) in the click-balance tool to turn on click-balance

again, and then click another point in the image.

Eyedropper

5. (Optional) Remove the click-balance setting for the image by clicking

the click-balance checkbox “off.”

Checkbox

6. Acquire the image as described earlier in this chapter.

Accessing Camera Images

6-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Applying Color Balance to Multiple Selected

Images

1. If you are not in the driver image window, return there now.

2. If you are not in C^ONTACTSHEET view, choose it now.

3. Select several images that need the same color balancing applied to

all of them; the settings you establish apply to all selected images.

4. As described in detail in the previous section:

A. Choose P^REVIEWfrom the VIEW menu; note that if multiple-images

were selected that they appear in a stack in P^REVIEW.

B. (Optional) Choose a larger image size from the Thumbnail/

Preview size menu.

C. Color balance the image using either the lighting menu or click-

balance tool.

5. Use the choices on the navigation bar to move through the selected

images.

First

Previous Go To

Last

6. (Optional) As you navigate through the images, change the color

balance as needed, repeatedly navigating through the images to

ensure that the color balancing results are as desired.

IMPORTANT: Notice that the color balance changes you make to one image

are applied to all of the selected set of images. This means that if one image

of the group has unsatisfactory color balance, and that you correct it, the

6-20

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

changes are applied to all of the other selected images. To correct that single

image without affecting others, return to C^ONTACTSHEET view, select only that

single image, enter Preview, and color balance the single image.

7. (Optional) If you want to use click-balance, but there is no white or

light gray area in the image, take a photograph of a neutral gray or

white card (for example KODAK Gray Cards, Publication No. R-27)

under the same lighting conditions that existed when the image was

taken. Then select the image of the card as well as all other images

taken under the same lighting conditions. Click the special cursor on

the image of the card; the color balance applies to all selected images.

Saving Color Balance Changes

1. Click the DONE button to leave the driver image window; all revisions

you have made in this work session are saved.

NOTE: The settings you chose while in the driver are saved, and will be in effect

the next time you enter the driver image window.

Crop Images

Suppose that you want to crop one or more images before acquiring

them. When you crop an image, its size at the source is not reduced; the

full image is always maintained. Instead, the results of your cropping

activity is a cropping rectangle stored with each cropped image. You

select one or more image and crop as described in this section; the same

cropping rectangle applies to all selected images. The resultant cropping

rectangle is visible over the images whenever the images are displayed by

the driver in any view.

When an image with a cropping rectangle is acquired into Photoshop,

only the image area within the cropping rectangle is acquired. Image

Accessing Camera Images

6-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

acquisition will be faster than with a full image, and the acquired image

will be smaller than a full-size image. And, if you are not satisfied with

your initial crop, you can revise or remove the cropping rectangle as

desired at any time. These actions are described below.

1. If you are not in the driver image window, access it as described

earlier in this chapter.

2. Select the image or images that you want to crop.

NOTE: You can not simultaneously crop multiple images from different

camera types. The DCS 410, DCS 420, and EOS•DCS 5 are the same camera

type; the NC2000e and EOS•DCS 3 are the same camera type; and the DCS

460, DCS 465, and EOS•DCS 1 are the same camera type.

3. Click the Crop icon.

6-22

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Wait as the CROP dialog box appears; note that if multiple-images

were selected that they appear in a stack in the box. In this step you

will set some of the options of this dialog box to crop images. (All

options are explained in detail in chapter 8.)

Stack indicates that

multiple images

will be cropped.

A. Choose one of the two available methods. FREEFORM is the correct

choice for most cropping activity, while F^IXEDSIZE is appropriate when

Accessing Camera Images

6-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

you know beforehand the exact output dimensions desired for the

image. Make one of these choices:

FREEFORM allows you to drag any edge of the selection rect-

angle in any direction.

FIXED SIZE allows you to specify the exact output dimensions

desired. A S^IZEdialog box appears; it allows you to establish

fixed dimensions (in inches or centimeters) for the crop

rectangle.

B. If the METHOD is FREEFORM, drag the mouse to create the desired

crop rectangle.

C. (Optional) Resize the rectangle by dragging its sides or corners.

D. (Optional) Reposition the rectangle by moving the cursor inside

the cropping rectangle, and dragging it to the desired position.

E. (Optional) Resize or reposition the cropping rectangle by entering

numeric values in the L^EFT, TOP, WIDTH, and HEIGHT text boxes. The

first two reposition the top left corner of the rectangle, and last

two control its width and height.

F. (Optional) Turn “on” the F^IXASPECT RATIO checkbox (an X appears

in the checkbox to the left of this option when on); the driver

holds the width and height in proportion while you adjust the

dimensions of the cropping rectangle.

NOTE: If you are working in FIXED SIZE, the FIX ASPECT RATIO checkbox is

always off.

G. (Optional) If multiple images were selected, click the navigation

buttons — first, previous, next, and last — beneath the image to

scroll through the selected images in the stack; the cropping

rectangle appears on each image. If the cropping rectangle does

not provide the desired cropping action for all selected images as

6-24

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

you step through them, resize or reposition cropping rectangle as

desired; the change affects the cropping rectangle on all selected

images.

First

Previous Go To

Last

H. (Optional) Turn “on” the CROP NEW IMAGES AFTER SHUTTER RELEASE

checkbox (an X appears in the checkbox to the left of this option

when on), and the cropping rectangle is superimposed on all new

images you take until you return here and turn off this option.

Keep in mind that all cropping rectangles can be revised later at

any time as desired.

I. (Optional) Remove the cropping rectangle from all images in the

stack by clicking R^EMOVE.

J. Click OK. The current cropping rectangle is superimposed on all

selected images and you are returned to the driver image window.

Close the Driver Image Window (Saving

Changes)

1. Click DONE; the driver image window closes and all changes to

settings you have made during this work session are saved.

2. Return to the driver later as desired and perform additional work as

described in this or the next section of this chapter.

Accessing Camera Images

6-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Working with Images in the Studio

This section is a tutorial on using the camera in a studio setting to take

new images.

NOTE: The earlier part of this chapter describes how you can work with images

on a PCMCIA card in the camera. All features described there also apply to studio

work (and are not repeated below), so we encourage you to review the earlier

sections of this chapter.

1. With the camera connected to your computer, access the driver image

window as described earlier in this chapter.

2. Choose C^AMERAfrom the SOURCE menu to work with images from a

connected camera.

3. Choose TEST SHOT from the VIEW menu. This displays a single image

which is always the most recent picture you take with the camera

after choosing T^ESTSHOT.

IMPORTANT: In TEST SHOT, images you take are not saved to the PCMCIA

card in the camera unless you click the K^EEPbutton as described below;

instead, images are displayed in the image area one at a time. Each new

image you take replaces the previous one, which is lost.

6-26

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. As prompted by a message that appears in the driver image window,

click the Take Picture icon (or use the shutter release to take a

picture). The camera takes a picture and displays it in the image area.

5. (Optional) If the “test” picture is one that you want to keep, click the

K^EEPbutton, and the image is saved to the PCMCIA card in the cam-

era. (The C^OPYTO button becomes the KEEP button when in TEST SHOT.)

6. (Optional) Adjust your studio settings as needed (reposition lighting,

etc.) and then take an additional test picture.

7. (Optional) Click the K^EEPbutton to save the image, or click the Take

Picture icon to take another picture — it replaces the previous image

which is not saved. (If you do not clicked K^EEP, a message warns you

that you are about to lose the current image.)

8. Choose C^ONTACTSHEET or PREVIEW from the VIEW menu (to leave TEST

SHOT). Subsequent images you take will be recorded on the PCMCIA

card in the camera.

9. Take additional images as desired.

10. Color balance, crop, rename, and annotate images as described in

earlier sections of this chapter.

11. Acquire images as described earlier in this chapter.

IMPORTANT: If you have not made any changes to the acquired image while

in Photoshop, and you click the close box of the acquired image window or

Accessing Camera Images

6-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

choose C^LOSEfrom the Photoshop FILE menu or quit Photoshop, the window

will close without asking you if you want to save it. Therefore, be sure you

save any acquired images you do not want to lose before closing their

windows or quitting Photoshop.

12. Click DONE; the driver image window closes and all changes to

settings you have made during this work session are saved.

6-28

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Playing Recorded Sound Files

Sound files recorded with the camera are saved to the PCMCIA card and

are associated with the image taken just before the sound was recorded.

Once in the driver, sound files associated with an image are represented

by the symbol below.

Sound file icon

1. Select a single image that has the sounds you want to play.

2. Use the Sound menu to play the sounds as follows:

A. If a single sound file was recorded with the image, it is played

through your computer speakers when you click the menu.

B. If multiple sound files were recorded, the menu displays the

choice A^LLand lists each sound (named SOUND 1, SOUND 2, and so

on). Select A^LLto play all sounds in sequence, or select an indi-

vidual item from the menu to play that single sound.

Sound menu

All

Sound 1

Sound 2

•

Accessing Camera Images

6-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Archive and Delete Images

The driver provides a variety of additional features that allow you to work

with image and sound files.

As described in this section, you can copy images from the PCMCIA card

in the camera to your computer hard disk for archival purposes and later

retrieval into Photoshop, and you can delete some or all of the images on

the PCMCIA card in the camera or on your computer hard disk.

Archiving images provides advantages over acquiring images. The file size

of an archived color image is much smaller than the file size of a color

image acquired and saved through Photoshop. Also, saving images as

archive files is faster than acquiring and saving them through Photoshop.

These features are briefly described here, and are explained fully in

chapter 8.

(Optional) Create Archive Files

1. Access the driver and display images from a PCMCIA card in the camera.

2. Select images you want to save as archive files.

NOTE: Archive files are composed of uninterpolated data; they have not been

“acquired” into Photoshop. This means they contain the raw, native data

generated from the imager in the camera back.

3. Click the COPY TO button. A “copy to” dialog box appears; make the

desired choices. The selected images (with any associated sound files,

revised filenames, cropping data, color balancing data, etc.), are saved

to your computer hard disk, with each image file and each sound file

becoming a separate file on your computer hard disk. The filenames

are generated by the driver unless you have renamed the files with the

Rename icon, in which case your names are used.

6-30

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Later, to work with these archive files, enter the driver, and use

C^HOOSEFOLDER from the SOURCE menu (Macintosh), or click the icon

near the S^OURCEdrop-down menu (TWAIN-PC), to locate and open

the folder with the archive images.

Macintosh

TWAIN (PC):

IMPORTANT: Use only the driver to open image archive files. Do not open

an archive file directly into Photoshop or other image software and then

resave the data with the same filename. Image archive files you create with

the C^OPYTO button contain several sections — one section with a TIFF

version of the thumbnail, and then another section with the image data.

When you open the file with Photoshop, only the TIFF thumbnail is opened,

and if saved, only the thumbnail is saved — not the image data. For this

reason, you should only open these files from within the driver image

window using the C^HOOSEFOLDER choice of the SOURCE menu as described in

this step; this will ensure that you obtain the image data.

IMPORTANT: If your camera model is of the type that requires a calibration

file (DCS 460 or EOS•DCS 1), refer to the important information on calibra-

tion (CAL) files for archived images in the section “Calibration (CAL) Files” at

the end of Chapter 7.

Accessing Camera Images

6-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Delete Files

1. Select images you want to delete.

2. Click the Delete button.

IMPORTANT: When clicked, the DELETE button deletes all selected images,

including those selected images that may have temporarily scrolled out of

view. The images are not only deleted from the driver image window, but are

also deleted from their source (PCMCIA card or archive file). Additionally,

sound files associated with the selected images are also deleted.

3. Respond as desired to the confirmation dialog box.

4. (Optional) Delete additional images from another source.

Revise Preferences

Clicking the preferences icon allows you to set many of the parameters

used in the driver, including: general preferences, contact sheet prefer-

ences, and color preferences. All are described in chapter 8.

Quitting

Follow these steps when you are done with the driver.

NOTE: The settings you chose while in the driver are saved, and will be in effect

the next time you enter the driver image window.

6-32

Accessing Camera Images

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Click the DONE button to leave the driver image window; all revisions

you have made in this work session are saved.

2. (Optional) Edit and save opened acquired images in Photoshop.

IMPORTANT: If you have not made any changes to the acquired image while

in Photoshop, and you click the close box of the acquired image window or

choose C^LOSEfrom the Photoshop FILE menu or quit Photoshop, the window

will close without asking you if you want to save it. Therefore, be sure you

save any acquired images you do not want to lose before closing their

windows or quitting Photoshop.

3. Quit Photoshop.

4. Turn off the camera and computer as described in an earlier chapter.

5. (Optional) Disconnect the camera from the computer.

IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the camera from the computer while the

computer is on.

6. (Optional) Disconnect the AC battery charger/adapter from the

camera.

Accessing Camera Images

6-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_{. . . . . . .}7_{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .}

Reference — Camera

This section of the manual explains and describes the following:

KODAK camera back and Imager.

Camera back controls.

PCMCIA cards.

Camera operating configurations.

Battery and AC battery charger/adapter.

Recorded sound.

On/off state of the camera back.

Timing considerations.

Troubleshooting the camera.

Cleaning a dirty imager.

Using a flash.

Reference — Camera

7-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KODAK Camera Back and Imager

The KODAK camera back incorporates a charge coupled device (CCD)

full-frame imager that collects light striking the imager.

The Specifications appendix lists the camera models available and the

dimensions of the imager and the size of the file produced by the imager.

Just after you take a picture, the Nikon N90s camera transmits data such

as the ISO, aperture, and shutter speed to the KODAK camera back

through the connector cable. After the shutter closes, the camera back

uses this information to process the image data.

Connector cable

When you take a picture, light passes through the lens onto the imager;

each pixel in the imager receives and stores a specified amount of light.

These data — for one image — leave the imager chip in analog form, and

7-2

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

are converted to digital form and stored with other data in dynamic

random access memory (DRAM).

Once the data are in DRAM, the data from the image are transferred to the

PCMCIA card. Hardware in the camera back generates a thumbnail from

the image data. The thumbnail is a subsample of image data. The thumb-

nail is then stored with the full image on the PCMCIA card.

You can use one of the supplied software drivers on your computer to

update firmware (nonvolatile memory) in the camera back that controls

how the camera works. This is a key feature since this design means it is

possible for you to update camera firmware yourself as it may be released

by Kodak instead of returning the camera for firmware updates.

A self-test of camera performance is available to you through a button on

the Camera Control panel of the software drivers. This can be helpful for

field troubleshooting before you call Kodak.

Timing Considerations

When you take a picture, it is first stored in DRAM; then the image is

moved from DRAM onto the PCMCIA card. Timing details appear in the

Specifications appendix.

Reference — Camera

7-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KODAK Camera Back Controls

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

A liquid crystal display (LCD) on the KODAK camera back provides status

information for the camera.

KODAK CAMERA BACK

LCD

DELETE

CARD BUSY

SCSI ID

7-4

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LCD CAMERA-OFF GRAPHICS

LCD FULL GRAPHICS

(For this illustration all items are shown simultaneously,

although at no time do all of these items appear together

on the LCD.)

ISO warning

Frames remaining

ISO

Battery indicator

Disk indicator

DEL SCSI

Delete indicator

SCSI indicator

Reference — Camera

7-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Indicator

When the camera is awake, the battery indicator displays the amount of

battery life — full, 2/3 full, and 1/3 remaining — in the battery in the

camera back. (There are no batteries in the Nikon N90s camera.) When

the battery life is exhausted, the bottom indicator blinks, and the battery

needs to be recharged. (Refer to “Battery” later in this chapter for informa-

tion on battery life.)

⁄

Full battery

3 full Low battery

Blinks when battery exhausted

When you operate with the AC battery charger/adapter connected, the

three segments of this icon light repeatedly in turn from bottom to top

while the battery is charging. When it is fully charged all three segments

remain lit.

Filling battery

7-6

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Frames Remaining Indicator — KODAK Camera

Back

The frames remaining indicator displays the number of additional pictures

that can be stored on the PCMCIA card currently in the camera.

Frames remaining

The number of images that can be stored on a PCMCIA card depends on

the storage capability of the card; an example of the storage capacity of

one size card appears in the Specifications appendix.

Frame Counter — Nikon N90s Camera

A separate numbering system is provided by the Nikon N90s camera. Its

frame counter appears in brackets near the right edge in the viewfinder

indication area and on the Nikon N90s LCD on top of the camera. These

numbers go up by one as each picture is taken. After reaching number 99,

the image reference numbers cycle back to 1, 2, etc.

The camera is ready for shooting as long as you see a Nikon N90s frame

counter in the viewfinder or on the LCD on top of the Nikon N90s. If no

value is displayed, the camera is not ready — perhaps the battery is low

or the card is full. Additionally, the frame counter disappears for several

Reference — Camera

7-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

seconds while image data are moved from memory in the camera system

to the PCMCIA card. When the frame counter reappears, the camera is

ready for shooting.

The number displayed in the Nikon N90s frame counter may be higher

than the maximum number of images that can be stored on the PCMCIA

card, since images stored on the PCMCIA card retain their numbers when

images with lower numbers are deleted.

The Nikon N90s frame counter is displayed with each image in the

software driver image window.

When you delete images (with the DELETE button on the camera back or

with a software driver), existing images on the PCMCIA card are not

renumbered. Consider the figure below. Suppose that you had an empty

PCMCIA card, took five pictures, and then deleted image 5 with the

DELETE button and images 2 and 3 with the software driver. Image 4 is

not renumbered. As new pictures are stored to the PCMCIA card, they are

given the next higher number that has not been previously used for an

image. In the figure below, new images will be numbered 6, 7, …

Frame number

The highest frame number is 99. It is possible that you will reach this

frame number by a continuous process of making images, deleting some,

and then making additional images. When you reach frame number 99,

7-8

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

the next picture you take will be numbered 1, then 2, then 3, and so on,

even if those numbers are already in use.

Therefore it is possible that you may have several images on a PCMCIA

card with the same number. Duplicate image numbers do not cause any

functional problems; however, you can avoid potential confusion by

occasionally erasing or formatting the PCMCIA card after copying all

needed images to your computer hard disk.

ISO Warning

“ISO” blinks as a warning on the LCD if you try to take a picture and the

Nikon N90s is not set to a supported ISO as listed in the Specifications

appendix.

If you take a picture and the camera is not set at a supported ISO, you will

be able to take one picture (with unpredictable results), but then the

camera back will automatically reset to a supported ISO. “ISO” blinks on

the camera back LCD until you take another picture or until the camera

goes to sleep; the new ISO will be displayed on the camera top LCD if the

N90s ISO button is pressed.

Blinking

ISO

Reference — Camera

7-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Disk Indicator

The disk indicator, shown in each of its stages below, appears when you

wake the camera. It indicates the amount of the available PCMCIA card

filled with images. When the entire disk indicator flashes, the PCMCIA

card is full.

Card

empty

Card up to

1/6 filled

Card filled

(indicator flashes)

Disk Error Indicator

Two characters, an “E” followed by a single digit (for example “E2”) — if

they appear on the LCD — indicate that an error has occurred on the

PCMCIA card. If this occurs, remove and reinsert the PCMCIA card (or try

another card if available), and retry the operation. If you continue to have

problems, refer to “Troubleshooting the Camera” in this chapter, and to

the discussion of F^ORMATin Chapter 8.

7-10

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control Buttons

Two control buttons — DELETE and SCSI ID — are provided on the

KODAK camera back. Both are recessed in the housing and are opera-

tional when pressed with a fingertip or other blunt object.

SCSI ID button

DELETE button

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

Reference — Camera

7-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DELETE Button and Delete Indicator

You use the DELETE button to delete the most recent image on the

PCMCIA card.

IMPORTANT: If you inadvertently delete images, an emergency procedure

provides an opportunity for you to recover images if you do so before making any

additional images. Refer to the explanation of the R^ECOVERbutton in Chapter 8.

To use the DELETE button, if you are not connected to a computer or the

AC battery charger/adapter, first turn on the camera and lightly press the

shutter release button to wake the camera. (If you are connected to a

computer that is “on,” or to the AC battery charger/adapter, the camera

back will be “on;” you do not need to turn on the Nikon N90s camera.)

Then press DELETE once to wake delete mode. The characters “DEL” —

the delete indicator — appear on the camera back LCD. Then press

DELETE again to delete the last image.

As long as the characters “DEL” appear on the LCD, you can press the

DELETE button again and again to delete additional images. With each

press the frames remaining indicator on the camera back increases by

one, indicating that there is now room for one additional image on the

PCMCIA card. The frame counter in the viewfinder does not change as a

result of deleting an image.

7-12

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Several seconds after you stop deleting images, delete mode turns off;

reactivate it, if needed, as described above, and press the DELETE button

again.

Frames remaining

Indicates delete mode

Disk indicator

DELETE button

DEL

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

Reference — Camera

7-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The DELETE button is for emergencies, not for routine operation. As an

example of its use, suppose you are beginning to shoot and realize that

the PCMCIA card is full, and that you do not have another PCMCIA card.

The DELETE button provides an on-site method of deleting images so that

you can continue to use the camera. Or perhaps you know that you need

to conserve space on the PCMCIA card and you realize that a picture you

have just taken is not satisfactory. You can use the DELETE button to

delete that image.

The DELETE button deletes only one image at a time, and only the most

recent image on the PCMCIA card. That is, if you have 20 images on the

PCMCIA card, you cannot delete the fifteenth image and leave the others.

However, you can delete the fifteenth image with one of the supplied

software drivers when connected to a computer. In addition you can use

the software drivers to delete multiple selected images simultaneously, or

to erase or format the entire PCMCIA card.

NOTE: The DELETE button does not function when the camera is connected to a

computer; use the D^ELETEbutton on the software driver to delete images in this

configuration.

7-14

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCSI ID Button and SCSI Indicator

You use the SCSI ID button to set the camera SCSI ID. The setting is

important when the camera is connected to your computer.

SCSI ID

SCSI indicator

SCSI

SCSI ID button

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

Reference — Camera

7-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

To set the SCSI ID, first make sure the camera is not connected to your

computer. Then turn on the camera and lightly press the shutter release

button (this is not necessary if you are connected to the AC battery

charger/adapter) to wake the camera. Then, press the SCSI ID button once

with your fingertip or other blunt object to wake SCSI mode. The charac-

ters “SCSI” — the SCSI indicator — appear on the camera back LCD as

does the current SCSI ID value, a single digit from 0 to 7, “PC,” or “PP.”

As long as the characters “SCSI” appear on the LCD, you can press the

SCSI ID button again and again to rotate through the available values.

Stop when you have selected the SCSI ID you want. Several seconds after

you press the SCSI ID button for the last time, SCSI mode turns off; reacti-

vate it — if needed — and press the SCSI ID button again.

Select the appropriate SCSI ID before you connect the camera to your

computer. Select an ID that is different from the SCSI ID of any other

connected SCSI devices.

“PC” SETTING FOR IBM LAPTOP CUSTOMERS (not for use with the

Macintosh): Use the “PC” SCSI ID setting only if you will be connecting the

camera to an IBM or compatible laptop computer using a PCMCIA-to-SCSI II

adapter (such as the Adaptec SlimSCSI used with EZ-SCSI 4.0 or the New Media

Bus Toaster), to connect the PCMCIA slot on your laptop (not the camera) to the

SCSI connector on the camera. “PC” sets the SCSI ID of the camera to 1 and turns

on active termination in the camera.

When you finish, take the camera out of “PC” mode, turn off the computer and

camera. If left in “PC” mode, a fully charged battery will be exhausted in approxi-

mately eight hours since the camera can not change to low power mode when

this SCSI setting is active.

“PP” SETTING: The “PP” setting, although it appears, is not currently supported

and should not be selected.

7-16

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCSI Connector (KODAK Camera Back)

A single 25-pin, female, subminiature D, SCSI connector appears on the

KODAK camera back.

You connect the camera to your computer from this connector with one

of the supplied SCSI cables. Once you connect it you can operate the

camera and the computer simultaneously. Detailed directions for making

this connection, and for using the camera in this state appear in Chapter 4.

SCSI ID button

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

SCSI connector

Reference — Camera

7-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multipurpose Connector (KODAK Camera Back)

A 7-pin mini-DIN connector on the camera back serves several purposes.

You plug the AC battery charger/adapter directly into this connector.

You connect the Kodak remote shutter release accessory into this

connector. Refer to the appendix “Optional Equipment & Spare Parts

List” for additional information.

You can also plug a cable accessory into this connector that allows

you to connect the camera into a Quantum Battery 5 — QB5. Refer to

the appendix “Optional Equipment & Spare Parts List” for additional

information.

DELETE

SCSI ID

CARD BUSY

Multipurpose connector

7-18

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PCMCIA Cards

“Standard,” removable, credit-card sized PCMCIA cards (Personal Com-

puter Memory Card International Association) are used for image storage.

The camera incorporates a PCMCIA-ATA Type III slot.

The camera saves images to the PCMCIA card currently plugged into the

KODAK camera back. You can fill one card, remove it, insert another

card, and continue shooting.

These removable, miniaturized media provide great flexibility since you

can carry a significant amount of image storage capability with you into

the field or the studio. The camera functions as a card reader, so no

separate PCMCIA card reader is required. However, if you have a com-

mercially available PCMCIA card reader for your computer system, you

can return only the card to a central site for image retrieval while the

camera remains in the field.

PCMCIA cards are extremely fragile, and are easily damaged — especially

if dropped. For this reason, use extreme care with the cards. Dropping a

card may destroy it, resulting in the loss of all of your data on the card.

Supported PCMCIA Cards

The camera is designed to accept PCMCIA hard disk cards that support

the PCMCIA “ATA” interface, although all such cards may not work.

(Refer to the read-me file on the supplied software driver diskette for

information on specific cards known to work with the camera.) The ATA

protocol is the same interface used for AT disk drives in PCs. PCMCIA

hard disk cards are available in a variety of sizes, for example 105, 170,

260, and 340 megabyte (MB) sizes.

In addition to PCMCIA hard disk cards, the camera will accept flash

memory cards if the cards support the ATA protocol. (This means that

standard PCMCIA memory SRAM cards are not supported.)

Reference — Camera

7-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Consult the specifications for your cards to determine if their operating

limits (for temperature, humidity, etc.), are more restrictive than those for

the camera, and if they are, adhere to those limits.

Card Busy Light

A red Card Busy LED appears on the camera back. When flashing, it

indicates that the camera back is accessing — reading from or writing to

— a PCMCIA card in place in the slot in the camera back; it is a warning

not to remove the installed PCMCIA card. If you do, you may lose all data

on the card. Wait until the blinking stops before removing the PCMCIA

card.

DOS Formatting and Card Access

The PCMCIA cards used for image storage must be (DOS) formatted. You

should format them with the camera using one of the supplied drivers as

described in Chapter 4.

The image and sound files placed on the cards by the camera system are

also DOS format files, meaning that if you have a separate card reader

you can use DOS commands on your PC, if available, to manage image

files without the software driver. If you have a separate card reader — or

other equipment that uses these PCMCIA cards — you can use that

equipment to store and retrieve files in a variety of formats on the cards.

Troubleshooting, Disk Recovery, and

Fragmentation

If you encounter a problem that you believe is associated with the

PCMCIA card, you can perform simple troubleshooting by trying another

card if available. Doing so will enable you to determine if the problem is

7-20

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

associated with that single PCMCIA card, or with another part of the

camera system. If the problem is with the PCMCIA card, you can try the

steps in the next paragraph.

The R^ECOVERbutton on the Camera Control panel of the software drivers

can be used in some circumstances while the camera is connected to a

computer to recover files that have been inadvertently deleted. In addi-

tion, since the PCMCIA card is in DOS format, it may be possible to

recover an image or sound file using PC utility programs, if available, with

file recovery features; doing so requires a separate PCMCIA card reader

since these programs cannot access the cards through the camera back. If

these actions are unsuccessful, you may need to format the card, an

operation which will erase all of your data on the card.

It is possible that a PCMCIA card may become fragmented, meaning that

files — such as the large image files — are broken into linked parts on

noncontiguous areas of the card. This can occur in several situations, such

as when small non-image files are stored in and among image files,

meaning that a large number of small unused areas are interspersed on the

card, rather than having all empty blocks together on one portion of the

card. Fragmentation can result, and if it does, it can result in slowed

camera performance.

If you believe this has occurred, you can delete all files on the card and/or

format the card — after saving files as desired to your computer hard disk.

You can also run a utility program (not supplied with the camera system)

with “defragger” capability that rearranges existing files into contiguous

areas of the PCMCIA card. This in turn frees large blocks on the card,

meaning that image files produced by the camera can be stored in a

single contiguous area — more efficient for file storage and retrieval.

Using a utility program requires a separate PCMCIA card reader since

these programs cannot access the cards through the camera back.

Reference — Camera

7-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Camera Operating Configurations

You can use the camera in the following equipment configurations.

IMPORTANT: Refer to Chapter 4 for specific cabling and termination details.

Supported Configurations

Each row of this table represents a supported configuration. Refer to the following

pages of this section for additional information.

PCMCIA

AC adapter

Connected

in camera connected

to computer

Yes

Yes ^{(1, 2)}

Yes ⁽²⁾

Yes

No ⁽³⁾

Yes

No ⁽⁴⁾

No ⁽³⁾

(1) The computer can be on or off, and can be running an image editing applica-

tion or another application.

(2) Other SCSI devices can be connected to the computer.

(3) Although this configuration is supported, we recommend you always use the

AC adapter when connected to a computer.

(4) The driver image window must be open to obtain images from the camera

back in this configuration.

7-22

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Taking Pictures While Connected to the

Computer

You can take pictures while the camera is connected to the computer (for

example in a studio). The following apply to this usage.

The camera functions independently, so if a PCMCIA card is in the

camera, it is not necessary for the computer to be running the soft-

ware driver while taking pictures. The camera will continue to func-

tion while connected to the computer even if other software is active

or if the computer is off.

The AC battery charger/adapter can be used with the camera. We

recommend this configuration.

If you use the camera while the software driver is running on the

computer, images will appear one-after-another in the image window

as you take pictures, allowing you to determine quickly if the current

image is acceptable or not.

If no PCMCIA card is in the camera, each new image replaces the

previous one. If you have an image you want to save, acquire it or

save it to an archive folder before taking another picture.

Do not take new pictures while an image is being acquired.

The DELETE button on the camera back is disabled while the camera

is connected to a computer. Instead use the D^ELETEbutton on the

driver image window of the software driver to delete images.

The Take Picture icon on the software driver can be clicked to issue a

command that directs the camera to take a picture.

Using the Camera with a PCMCIA Card

With a PCMCIA card installed in the camera, the unit is portable, and can

be used in the large variety of stand-alone shooting situations in which the

Nikon N90s can be used.

Reference — Camera

7-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Images are stored on the PCMCIA card as you take them. The camera will

not operate once the PCMCIA card is full. When full, you will need to do

one or more of the following.

Use the DELETE button on the camera to delete the most recently

made image(s) from the PCMCIA card.

NOTE: The DELETE button does not function when the camera is connected

to a computer; use the D^ELETEbutton on the software driver to delete images

in this configuration.

Attach the camera to the computer, and use a supplied software driver

to delete images from the PCMCIA card (after acquiring them from the

camera if desired), or while connected, use T^ESTSHOT.

Remove the full PCMCIA card and insert another PCMCIA card with

space available for additional images.

Using the Camera Without a PCMCIA Card

While Connected to a Computer

You can use the camera without a PCMCIA card only if you are con-

nected to a computer and running one of the supplied software drivers. In

this configuration, the software operates in T^ESTSHOT view, except that

when you click K^EEP, the COPY TO dialog box is displayed allowing you to

select a folder location to save the image.

If there is no PCMCIA card in the camera, you can only take a picture if

the driver image window is opened.

7-24

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery and AC Battery Charger/

Adapter

Battery Charging for Optimal Capacity

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to remove the battery; it is not a customer service-

able part.

The camera incorporates a single, rechargeable nickel hydride battery that

powers both the camera back and the Nikon N90s camera; no batteries

are installed in the Nikon camera. The Specifications appendix lists the

number of frames you can expect from a fully-charged battery in typical

shooting situations.

Battery charging is inhibited when the internal battery temperature is

above 120˚ F (50˚ C). The camera will continue to operate for as long as

the battery charge is sufficient. You will not be able to power the camera

until the internal battery temperature drops below this limit.

Under normal conditions, charging the battery for at least two hours

provides optimal capacity. However, under very cold or very hot condi-

tions, charge for at least 30 minutes after the LCD battery indicator

indicates a full charge. Charge the battery as close to the time the camera

will be used as possible. (Waiting in excess of two days before shooting

will result in reduced battery capacity.)

Use the AC battery charger/adapter when connected to a computer if

possible; use without the adapter in this configuration for an extended

time period will drain the battery. Leaving the camera connected to the

AC battery charger/adapter will not maintain a full charge; therefore

disconnect before use, then reconnect and charge for two hours to ensure

a full charge. Extended camera metering or focusing reduces the number

of images available from a charge.

Reference — Camera

7-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AC Battery Charger/Adapter

AC BATTERY CHARGER/ADAPTER

To camera

POWER CORD

To AC battery charger/adapter

To wall outlet

CAUTION: Observe all cautions regarding this unit included in “AC

Battery Charger/Adapter — Important Warnings” at the front of this

manual.

You can use the supplied AC battery charger/adapter to operate the

camera and to charge the battery in the KODAK camera back.

You can operate the camera while connected to the supplied AC battery

charger/adapter, or you can recharge the battery with the adapter and

then use the camera in the field without the adapter. The adapter will run

the camera continuously while it is charging the battery.

7-26

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The adapter is a universal unit, with a range of 95–250 volts, 47–63 Hz,

without a switch.

If you are using the camera in an environment in which a power outlet is

available, for example in a studio or when connected to a computer, we

recommend that you operate the camera while connected to the AC

battery charger/adapter.

External Battery Adapter

This optional accessory allows the camera to be used with the Quantum

Battery 5 (QB5). Refer to the appendix “Optional Equipment & Spare Parts

List” for additional information.

Reference — Camera

7-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recorded Sound

The camera can record sound via a built-in microphone positioned in the

camera back. This feature, implemented with a goal of simplicity and ease

of use, allows you to record audio information about images or other

subjects.

Microphone

Record button

DELETE

CARD BUSY

SCSI ID

The feature is intended as an annotation system that records sound at

“telephone quality” — 8-bits, 11 kilohertz, monaural. Recorded sound is

saved as a “.WAV” file on the PCMCIA card; WAV files are the Windows

standard sound file format. Sound files are time- and date-stamped when

written to the PCMCIA card.

As a sound segment is recorded, it is held briefly in dynamic random

access memory (DRAM) in the camera back, and is then moved to the

7-28

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PCMCIA card where it is saved as a sound file. As a result, the card may

contain an intermingling of image and sound files.

The camera alone cannot play the recorded sound; instead, a computer is

needed to access and play the sound files.

How to Record Sound

To record sound, make sure that a PCMCIA card is in the camera back,

then turn on and wake the camera (or operate while connected to the AC

battery charger/adapter or to a computer that is on), and hold the camera

back approximately six inches (15 cm) from your mouth, press and hold

the record button, speak into the microphone, and when finished, release

the record button. The center dot of the disk icon on the camera back

LCD comes on when sound is being recorded.

Recording

If the shutter release is pressed while the record button is down, audio

recording stops until the image has been recorded. If the record button is

still down, the camera begins to record sound again.

For simplicity there are no controls other than the record button; there is

no volume control, and no way to set the recording level.

Sound will not be recorded while shooting an image.

Reference — Camera

7-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

As sound is being recorded, segments of the disk icon bounce up and

back, serving as a level meter (similar to the levels commonly displayed

on audio equipment like tape decks). The bouncing segments provide

feedback, a visual indication that sound is being recorded. The best

quality recording occurs when 4-5 segments are on.

No sound

Maximum

Sound files are loosely associated with the image taken before the sound

was recorded.

Recording “Lengthy” Audio Segments

Approximately 25 seconds of uninterrupted sound can be recorded in a

single file. If you press and hold the record button for over 25 seconds, a

slightly different recording action will occur.

The first 25 seconds of audio fills all available dynamic random

access memory. Recording then stops for up to several seconds —

even though the button is still depressed — while the data in memory

are moved to a new file on the PCMCIA card by the camera. Then

recording begins again for another 25 seconds, after which this new

segment of sound is moved to a new sound file on the PCMCIA card,

and so on. Each 25 second segment is stored on the card as a separate

file.

7-30

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

During the interruption between each 25 second segment, the red

Card Busy light on the camera back blinks, and the dot in the disk

icon goes off. These indicate that data are being written to the card,

and that sound is not being recorded.

Sound File Size

You can completely fill a PCMCIA card with only sound files; the limit is

the storage capacity of the PCMCIA card.

When sound is not being recorded, you can refer to the disk icon on the

camera back LCD; it indicates the combined proportion of the PCMCIA

card filled with image and/or audio files.

Playing Sound Files

Recorded sound files can be played from the PCMCIA card with the

software driver and your computer as explained in Chapter 8. No addi-

tional hardware is required to play the recorded file on a Macintosh

computer; a sound board is required to play the recorded file on a PC.

Reference — Camera

7-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

On/Off State of the KODAK Camera

Back

There is no separate on/off switch for the KODAK camera back. Instead,

when you turn on and then wake the Nikon camera, the camera back

turns on. As described in this section, it is possible for the camera back to

be on when the camera is off.

The on/off state of the KODAK camera back depends on the mode of

camera operation as follows.

If the camera is operated without the AC battery charger/adapter and

without being connected to a computer, the camera back is “on”

while the Nikon N90s is awake, and sleeps when the camera sleeps. If

the camera is saving an image to a PCMCIA card when the Nikon

Camera sleeps, the camera back remains on until the image is saved.

The camera back is continuously “on” when the camera is operated

while connected to the AC battery charger/adapter; once the batteries

are fully charged the adapter switches automatically to a slow trickle

charge. If the camera is saving an image to a PCMCIA card when the

adapter is disconnected, the camera back remains on until the image

is saved.

The camera back is also continuously “on” when the camera is

operated while connected to a computer that is on. If the camera is

saving an image to a PCMCIA card when the computer is turned off,

the camera back remains on until the image is saved.

7-32

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting the Camera

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

No power when using

the battery.

The Nikon camera is

not on.

Slide the Nikon camera power

switch to on.

The battery is

discharged.

Charge the battery with the AC

battery charger/adapter, or operate

from the AC battery

charger/adapter.

No power to charge the

battery when using the

AC battery

The cable from the AC

battery charger/adapter

to the camera back is

loose or not plugged

into the camera back.

Make sure the cable is connected

to the camera back and seated

securely.

charger/adapter.

The AC battery

Make sure the cable is connected

to the wall and seated securely.

charger/adapter cable is

loose or not plugged in

at the wall.

There is no power at

the power source.

Have the power source repaired

and/or try another power source.

The AC battery

Replace the cable.

charger/adapter power

cable is faulty.

The AC battery

charger/adapter is

faulty.

Contact Kodak.

Reference — Camera

7-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

There are unexpected

delays when reading from

or writing to a PCMCIA

card.

The battery is cold.

Warm the battery to room

temperature.

Condensation may be

present in the camera or

PCMCIA card.

Condensation may be present if

the camera is moved from a

relatively cold environment (like

an air conditioned hotel room),

into a warm, humid environment.

We recommend that you allow

sufficient time for the camera to

normalize within the specified

environmental ranges before

operation.

The data on the

PCMCIA card is

fragmented.

Run a utility program (not

supplied with the camera system)

that includes “defragger”

capability, or move files from the

card to your computer hard disk

and reformat the card with the

supplied software driver.

The PCMCIA card is

damaged or defective.

Try another card.

7-34

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

Pressing the camera

shutter release button

does not release the

shutter.

The Nikon N90 camera

is in a programmed

auto exposure mode

and the lens is not at

the minimum aperture.

Change to another exposure

mode, or stop down to the

minimum aperture.

The Nikon N90 camera

is in single servo

autofocus mode (S) and

is unable to focus.

Change to another focus mode,

or re-aim the camera from a

different position or remove the

lens cap.

No PCMCIA card is in

place in the camera

system.

Insert a PCMCIA card or operate

the camera system while

connected to a computer as

described earlier in this chapter.

The camera is off.

Turn on the camera.

The PCMCIA card in

the camera back is full.

Delete images from the PCMCIA

card in the camera back.

Blinking

If connected to a computer,

delete images or erase the

PCMCIA card with the software

driver.

Use another PCMCIA card, if

available.

The PCMCIA card is

not formatted; “E6”

appears on the camera

back LCD.

Format the PCMCIA card as

described in Chapter 4, and try

again.

continued

Reference — Camera

7-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

continued from previous

page

The battery is low.

Recharge the battery, or operate

from the AC battery charger/

adapter.

Pressing the camera

shutter release button

does not release the

shutter.

Blinks when

Full battery

battery is

exhausted

The characters “ISO”

appear on the camera

back LCD.

The camera ISO was

not set within the

Use a supported ISO as described

in the Specifications appendix.

prescribed range when

the most recent picture

was taken. (The camera

will have already reset

the ISO to an allowed

setting.)

ISO

7-36

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

Two characters, an “E”

followed by a single digit

(for example “E2”),

appear on the camera

back LCD.

An error occurred on

the PCMCIA card or in

DRAM.

For the problems below, remove

and reinsert the PCMCIA card and

try again. If unsuccessful, do a

“sleep/awake” sequence: let the

camera back sleep (disconnect

the AC adapter from the camera

back, shut down the computer if

connected, and disconnect the

camera back from the computer),

reconnect and try again. If you

continue to have problems format

the PCMCIA card with the Format

button on the driver Camera

Control panel (this will erase all

images and sound files from the

card). If the problem persists,

contact Kodak; report the number

of the error condition.

E2 – failure of the PCMCIA card

to start.

E3 – failure when attempting to

read the PCMCIA card.

E4 – failure when attempting to

write to the PCMCIA card.

E5 – defective card, a non-ATA

card, or a card that does not

work. (Refer to the read-me on

the driver diskette for a list of

supported cards.)

E6 – unformatted PCMCIA card.

E7 – defective card, a non-ATA

card, or a card that does not

work. (Refer to the read-me on the

driver diskette for a list of

supported cards.)

Reference — Camera

7-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

You are losing images

from the PCMCIA card.

An error occurred on

the card.

Turn off the camera so that the

camera back goes off. Turn on the

camera and retry the operation. If

you continue to have problems,

reformat the PCMCIA card with

the Format button on the camera

control dialog box of the software

driver. (This will erase all existing

images from the card.)

If the problem persists, contact

Kodak.

Image data on the

PCMCIA card have

become corrupted; you

are unable to access the

image data.

You may be using an

improper SCSI cable to

connect the camera

system to your

Use only the supplied SCSI cables

(or other cables as specified in

Chapter 4 to attach the camera or

other peripherals to the computer.

computer.

Your SCSI chain is not

terminated properly.

Ensure that the SCSI chain is

terminated properly as described

in Chapter 4.

The files have become

corrupted for an

unknown reason.

If you have access to an IBM PC

or compatible computer with a

PCMCIA card reader and disk

utility software, you may be able

to recover image and sound files

with that utility software.

If that computer system is

unavailable or that action is

unsuccessful, you may need to

format the disk with the camera,

an operation which will erase all

of your data on the card.

7-38

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

The camera acts

The battery in the

camera back is low or

dead.

Recharge the battery in the

camera back.

erratically, unusual or

unexpected characters

appear on the camera

back LCD, or the LCD

flickers unexpectedly.

Blinks when

battery is

exhausted

If the unusual behavior

continues for over five

minutes the battery may

need to be replaced by

Kodak.

Contact Kodak.

The firmware in the

camera has become

corrupted.

Update camera firmware, as

described in Chapter 8.

You are experiencing

erratic camera behavior or

unusual characters appear

on the camera back LCD.

You know the battery is

charged.

The firmware in the

camera has become

corrupted.

Update camera firmware as

described in Chapter 8.

The camera is stuck in

one mode for unknown

reasons.

An unexplained event

may have occurred.

Update camera firmware as

described in Chapter 8.

The camera system is warm A warm temperature is

Continue to operate the camera

normally.

when the camera is

connected to the AC

battery charger/adapter.

normal.

Reference — Camera

7-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

When the camera is

Polarity is reversed in

the studio flash — a

condition that becomes

apparent when the

camera smystem is

If the plug is reversible, reverse

the plug where the sync cord

plugs into the flash.

connected to a computer,

and/or the camera is being

operated with the AC

battery charger/ adapter, a

connected studio flash will grounded.

not go off, or goes off only

Or, operate with an IR slave or a

radio slave.

You can confirm this

once and then freezes.

condition by operating

the camera with the

flash after

disconnecting the AC

adapter and the

computer; the flash

should then operate

normally.

You have other problems

with a flash.

A non-dedicated

incompatible electronic

flash is being used.

Refer to the section “Using a

Flash” at the end of this chapter.

7-40

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the Imager

The imager is the component of the camera that records light when you

take a picture. Even though it is located inside the camera back, it is still

possible for the imager to become dirty.

The directions in this section describe how to determine if the imager

needs cleaning, and how to clean the imager.

Determining If the Imager is Dirty

There are two ways to determine whether the imager needs cleaning:

You can take a test picture and look for imperfections in the image

that indicate dirt on the imager.

You can visually inspect the imager for dirt.

Both techniques are described below.

Technique 1: Examine a Test Image

1. Set up the camera to operate while connected to a computer.

2. Set the lens aperture to its highest f number, to provide for maximum

depth of field.

3. Take a photograph of a plain white object like a clean, white wall.

4. Examine the image on the computer monitor; imperfections in the

image, such as dark clusters or streaks, may indicate a dirty imager.

Technique 2: Visually Inspect the Imager

1. Set up your camera to operate in stand-alone mode (not connected to

either a computer or the AC battery charger/adapter).

Reference — Camera

7-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Turn off the camera.

3. Remove the lens from the camera.

4. Turn on the camera.

5. Set the camera to manual exposure mode.

6. Select the bulb setting.

7. Press and hold the shutter release button; the shutter stays open, and

the imager is visible through the lens mounting flange.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean the imager while the camera is in

this state; the shutter can be damaged if you release the shutter button

while any object is in the opening.

Imager

(visible through

lens mounting flange)

Lens mounting flange

7-42

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. Hold the camera so that light reflects off the imager; visually inspect

the imager for grease, fingerprints, lint, or other dirt.

9. Release the shutter release button.

10. Turn off the camera.

11. Mount the lens.

12. Turn on the camera and reset the exposure mode and move off the

bulb setting.

13. If the imager is clean, proceed to operate the camera normally;

however, if the imager is dirty, clean it using the following steps.

Cleaning a Dirty Imager

CAUTION: In the following steps you will separate the camera body and

the camera back — an action that exposes the imager to the environ-

ment. Because the imager is sensitive to static discharge, you must

observe the static discharge control measures described below.

As you complete these steps, be certain that you do not touch the inside

of the camera back (except as instructed).

Separating the Camera from the KODAK

Camera Back

1. Locate or order cleaning materials for the camera. Cleaning materials

are not supplied with all camera models, but can be ordered from

Reference — Camera

7-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Kodak. These include an electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap, low-

lint web cleaner pads, and a cleaning solution. The wrist strap is used

to provide protection against damaging electronic components of the

camera back.

IMPORTANT: Use only the cleaning materials available from Kodak.

WRIST STRAP

CLEANER PADS

Clip

CLEANING

SOLUTION

2. Assemble the electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap (if assembly is

necessary). The wrist strap protects electronic components of the

camera back from static damage.

7-44

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Attach the strap to your hand.

4. Turn off the camera.

5. If the AC battery charger/adapter is connected, disconnect it from the

camera.

6. Lay the camera on its back on a flat, steady surface.

Reference — Camera

7-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. Unscrew the coupling nut at the top of the connector cable and pull

straight out to remove the connector cable from the Nikon N90s

camera.

Unscrew ( ) . . .

. . .then pull straight out.

8. Loosen the handstrap (do not remove it) by separating the Velcro

parts; you may need to slide the buckle down on the lower end of the

strap to loosen it.

9. Loosen the large mounting screw in the center of the base of the

camera back until it turns freely.

Mounting screw

7-46

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. CAUTION: Use extreme caution as you complete this step because

the Nikon N90s and the KODAK camera back are connected by two

thin wires.

Hold down the camera back with one hand while you use the other

hand to lift the camera body up and to the side of the camera back.

Reference — Camera

7-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. Push the head of the mounting screw until it is flush against the

bottom of the camera back. This action exposes the threads on the

other end of the mounting screw.

Threads

Push

12. Attach the clip on the end of the ESD wrist strap cable to the exposed

threads on the end of the mounting screw; you and the camera will

now be at the same potential.

7-48

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wiping the Imager

1. Examine the imager visually. If there is lint on the imager (but not

grease, fingerprints, or other dirt), continue at step 9; otherwise

continue with the next step.

2. Dampen one corner of the web cleaning pad sparingly with the

cleaning solution.

3. Wrap the damp corner of the cleaner pad over the forefinger of one

hand.

4. Hold the camera back firmly in place on the flat surface with your

other hand.

5. Gently scrub the imager with the damp corner of the cleaner pad; use

a circular motion, and move over the entire imager. This action

should dislodge dirt and/or remove grease and fingerprints.

Reference — Camera

7-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Wipe off residue on the imager surface by wiping repeatedly straight

across the imager with a dry corner of the cleaning pad.

7. Gently lift the camera back, and examine the imager in the light to

determine if it has been cleaned successfully.

8. If the imager is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 7.

9. Place the camera back on a flat surface and breathe gently on the

imager to fog its surface.

10. Wipe repeatedly straight across the imager with a dry corner of the

cleaner pad.

11. Gently lift the camera back, and examine it in the light to determine if

it has been cleaned successfully.

12. If there is still lint on the imager, repeat steps 9 through 11.

7-50

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reassembling the Camera

1. Remove the ESD wrist strap from the mounting screw and from your

wrist.

2. Push the threaded end of the mounting screw back into the camera

back.

Push

3. CAUTION: As you complete this step be certain that the thin wires

recede into their openings in the Nikon N90s camera and KODAK

camera back.

Hold down the camera back with one hand while you use the other

hand to push the camera body into place against the camera back.

4. Tighten the mounting screw.

Mounting screw

Reference — Camera

7-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Push the connector cable coupling firmly back into place into the

Nikon N90s camera and tighten the coupling nut.

Push straight in . . .

. . . then tighten ( ) coupling nut.

6. Reposition the buckle on the lower end of the handstrap and recon-

nect the Velcro.

The camera is now ready.

7-52

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using a Flash

WARNING: Do not connect a non-dedicated electronic flash unit to the

camera (hot shoe or PC terminal) without verification from a Nikon

authorized service facility that the flash unit is compatible with the

camera body. Some electronic flash units will damage the camera body

unless they are isolated with an IR slave or a radio slave. Check with a

Nikon authorized service facility for compatible equipment.

Flash units or flash accessories designed for dedicated use with other

camera brands will not work properly and may damage the camera

body.

When using a dedicated Nikon flash, you may need to set exposure

compensation on the camera body. Take test pictures to verify proper

exposure.

When using studio flash or non-dedicated flash you must set the camera

to manual exposure mode to set the proper shutter speed for flash syn-

chronization. Use the included Nikon N90s manual to identify shutter

speeds that work with these settings.

The shutter speed for flash synchronization with studio flash may be

different from dedicated Nikon flash synchronization. Before use, test the

flash at various shutter speeds to make sure it synchronizes properly with

the camera.

When using the camera with a studio flash, if either the SCSI cable or the

charger are connected, it may be necessary to reverse the ground polarity

of the flash cord in order for the flash to work; alternately, use an IR slave

or a radio slave to isolate the camera from the flash.

(The read-me file on the supplied driver diskette may contain additional

information regarding using a flash.)

Reference — Camera

7-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration (CAL) Files —

DCS 460 Only

In order to use any images taken with your DCS 460 Camera, a “calibra-

tion” (CAL) file designed for your particular camera back must be present

on your computer hard disk. Instructions in Chapter 4 describe how to

install that CAL file. If several different cameras are in use at your loca-

tion, the unique CAL file for each camera must be installed in order to

access images from each camera; this means that you may have multiple

CAL files on your hard disk.

CAL files are required in order to display thumbnails or previews of

images in the driver image window, and are required in order to acquire

an image. If the CAL file is not on your hard disk, or not in the proper

place on your hard disk, you will see a message specifying the name of

the missing CAL file when the driver attempts to display the image, and

you will not be able to display or acquire the image.

When you copy images from a PCMCIA card to your hard disk with the

C^{OPY TO}button, the CAL file(s) associated with the camera(s) used to take

the selected images are automatically copied to the folder with the

images. The calibration files are needed subsequently to display and/or

acquire the images. For this reason it is very important that you do not

delete any CAL files you find in folders with your images.

If you transport your images to another computer system (perhaps you are

distributing unacquired images to others at a different location at which

the software driver has been installed), be certain that you also transport

the CAL files found in the folder with the images. You will not be able to

display those images in the driver image window, nor will you be able to

acquire those images, unless their associated CAL files are available. The

CAL files should be placed in the same folder as the images.

7-54

Reference — Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_{. . . . . . .}8_{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .}

Reference — KODAK Driver

Software

This section of the manual includes detailed information about the

KODAK driver, including:

General Features.

Driver commands.

Adobe Photoshop features of interest to camera users.

Driver messages.

Driver troubleshooting.

IMPORTANT: Throughout this chapter we refer to “Photoshop.” This single

reference refers to both the Macintosh and PC versions of Photoshop, and also to

other supported PC TWAIN-compliant image-editing software.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Features

When you access the driver, you see the following window — called the

driver image window — on your computer monitor. Within it is the image

area which displays images, either thumbnails or a single larger image

called a preview. Thumbnails and preview images can be displayed in

several different sizes. A variety of menus, icons, buttons, textboxes, and

indicators surround the image area of the driver image window. These are

described in detail in this chapter.

The driver can display images from a variety of supported Kodak camera

types. This means that you can use the same PCMCIA card with different

supported Kodak cameras and view all of the images with the same driver.

The letters shown on the illustration below correspond to the sections of

this chapter in which the labeled items are described.

KEY TO FIGURE: All driver features are identified by letter in the following figure;

full explanations of all features appear in order by these letters in this chapter.

A. Source Menu

N. Acquire Button

B. View Menu

O. Copy To Button

C. Active Photoshop Menus

D. Acquire As Menu

E. Take Picture Icon

F. Camera Control Icon

G. Preferences Icon

P. Delete Button

Q. Done Button

R. Annotation Area

S. Image Information Window

T. Navigation Bar

H. Rename Images Icon

I. Rotate Clockwise/Counterclockwise Icons

J. Crop Icon

U. Select All Icon

V. Number of Images Selected

W. X-Y Cursor Location

X. RGB Values at the Cursor Location

K. Lighting Menu

L. Click-Balance Tool

M. Sound Menu

Y. Thumbnail/Preview Size Menu

8-2

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driver Image Window (Macintosh and TWAIN):

A B

Edit

The driver provides a variety of features that allow you to work with

image and sound files on the PCMCIA card in the camera, on your

computer hard disk, and in memory of the camera. The driver allows you

to return from a photographic shoot, rapidly view the images, and acquire

selected images (or a contact sheet of images), immediately into

Photoshop. The driver is also designed to allow you to work with your

camera in a studio setting.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

You can transfer selected images to your computer hard disk for archival

purposes and/or for later retrieval into Photoshop. You can then delete

some or all of the images on the PCMCIA card in preparation for making

additional images on that card. Sound files can be played through the

driver and are saved to your computer hard disk when their correspond-

ing image is archived.

You select thumbnail images in the image area by clicking an image, by

shift-clicking (on a Macintosh) or control-clicking (on a PC) to add or

subtract from the selected images, by dragging the mouse over adjacent

thumbnails, by clicking the A^LLbutton, or by choosing the ALL or NONE

choices on the Photoshop SELECT menu (which is active while you are in

the driver image window). A narrow color border surrounds highlighted

images.

You scroll through the images by moving the vertical scroll box or scroll

arrows, or with a row of navigation tools — the navigation bar — on the

driver image window. The navigation tools allows you to move to the first

or last image, forward or back to the image before or after the selected

image, or to a specific image by entering its number. (Refer to the “Navi-

gation Bar” section of this chapter for a full explanation of this tool.)

Depending on the size and configuration of your monitor, and the thumb-

nail size, you see one or more thumbnails on each row, and one or more

rows of thumbnails in the image area of the driver image window.

The image filename (which may be a default name assigned by the driver,

or a name you have assigned), appears with each image, as does the

frame number.

To use the driver, you must first install it by following the series of one-

time steps described in the chapter “Preparing the Camera and the Com-

puter.” Then each time you want to use the driver, you access it as

described in those chapters.

8-4

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Defaults — Driver Image Window

The following default values are used for the driver image window each

time you begin a work session. Once you have entered the driver image

window, you can change these values as desired.

Source. The driver always looks for an attached camera first. If no

camera is found, the driver opens the last image folder with which

you were working, and if no folder is found, you are asked to select a

folder.

View. This setting always opens as CONTACT SHEET.

Acquire As. This setting always opens as PHOTO.

Rotation. The default value is no rotation.

Crop. The default value is no cropping.

Lighting. The default value is the lighting setting of the first image

retrieved; if there are no images at the source, then D^AYLIGHTis the

default.

Click-balance. The default setting is no click-balance in effect.

Thumbnail/Preview size. The value of this setting is from the end of

the previous work session is applied.

In addition, many settings for choices on dialog boxes are also maintained

in a preferences file from work session to work session.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commands

This section of the chapter describes each element of the driver image

window. The letter before each command corresponds to the letters

shown on the illustration at the start of this chapter.

NOTE: As you work with the driver, notice that all features are not always active;

instead, some choices are dimmed. This is normal operation, for all features are

not always applicable to the current settings and are therefore dimmed by the

driver. For example, when you are in T^ESTSHOT, you can only work with one

image at a time. For that reason the navigation tools are dimmed since there are

no other images to which you can move.

A. SOURCE Menu

Macintosh:

TWAIN (PC):

Allows you to work with images from a camera connected to your com-

puter or from image archive files that you have previously copied to a

folder on your computer hard disk.

8-6

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CAMERA

Use the CAMERA option to work with images from a connected camera.

With this source, the window title bar displays the camera name.

FOLDER

Choose FOLDER to work with images in the folder you were working with

before working with the current source. For example, make this choice if

you are working with the C^AMERAas source, and want to return to the

archive folder you were using before choosing C^AMERA.

CHOOSE FOLDER

Use the CHOOSE FOLDER option to select a folder containing images you

have saved previously (with the C^OPYTO button) to your computer hard

disk. When you work with this option, all image archive files and sound

files from the selected folder replace the current contents of the driver

image window. This choice is implemented differently in the Macintosh

and TWAIN drivers:

Macintosh: Choose FOLDER from the SOURCE popup menu.

TWAIN: Click the icon near the Source drop-down menu.

B. VIEW Menu

Allows you to set the desired view of images in the image area of the

driver image window: C^ONTACTSHEET displays multiple image thumbnails,

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREVIEW displays a single large image, and TEST SHOT displays a single large

image from the camera (allowing for adjustments before saving an image).

CONTACT SHEET

Choose CONTACT SHEET to view all image files from the camera or an

archive folder source. The images are displayed in rows of multiple

thumbnails, with the size of each thumbnail determined by the thumbnail/

preview size menu on the driver image window.

PREVIEW

Select an image (or images) while in CONTACT SHEET and then choose

P^REVIEWto view an enlarged version of an image from its source. If mul-

tiple images are selected, they appear as a stack of images in P^REVIEW.

This option is useful when a close examination of the image is desired, for

example when changing the color balance options (the effect of color

balance adjustments are evident more readily with a larger image than

with smaller contact sheet images).

Color balancing while in P^REVIEWworks differently depending on whether

you have selected a single image or multiple images before choosing

P^REVIEW.

When you select a single image, and enter PREVIEW to color balance it,

the revised color balancing applies only to that single image. While

still in Preview, you can then navigate through one single image after

another, making changes that apply to just that single image.

However, when you select multiple images and then enter PREVIEW to

color balance them, the revised color balancing applies to all selected

images. Using the navigation tool as described just below allows you

8-8

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

to move through the subset of selected PREVIEW images to ensure that

the color balancing is appropriate for all images.

You move through the large format preview images from the source with

the image navigation tools as described below.

If you have selected no images when you choose PREVIEW, the first

image of the source is displayed in P^REVIEWview. If you click any of

the navigation buttons you move through all source images using the

first image as the starting point.

If you have selected only one image before you choose PREVIEW, that

image is displayed in P^REVIEWview. If you click any of the navigation

buttons you move through all source images using that image as the

starting point.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have selected multiple images before you choose PREVIEW, the

first of the selected images is displayed, and the images appear in a

stack. The navigation buttons move you through only the selected set

of images. For example if you select images 3, 6, 7, 9, and 10, image 3

would be displayed upon entering P^REVIEW. If you press the “next”

navigation icon, image 6 is displayed; if you press the “last” navigation

icon, image 10 is displayed.

While in PREVIEW, if you type an image number into the text area of the

navigation box, that image is displayed. However, if you are working

with a stack of images, you will receive an error message if you type

an image number, and the number does not correspond to one of the

selected images.

The size of the preview image is controlled by the thumbnail/preview size

menu. If the image in the selected display size does not fit in the image

area, the scroll bars are enabled.

The window title bar displays the name of the image source followed by

the name of the image currently being shown.

TEST SHOT

Choose TEST SHOT to work with a single image which is always a picture

you take with the camera after entering T^ESTSHOT. In TEST SHOT, images you

take are not saved to the PCMCIA card in the camera unless you click the

K^EEPbutton as described below; instead, images are displayed in the image

area one at a time. Each new image you take replaces the previous one,

which is lost.

T^ESTSHOT allows you to make adjustments to camera settings and other

settings as needed (reposition lighting, etc.), without wasting disk space on

the PCMCIA card.

If the “test” picture is one that you want to keep, click the KEEP button, and

the image is saved to the PCMCIA card in the camera. (The C^OPYTO

8-10

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

button becomes the KEEP button when in TEST SHOT.) If you do not want to

keep the image, take another picture — it replaces the previous image

which is not saved. (If you do not clicked K^EEP, a message warns you that

you are about to lose the current image.)

Choose C^ONTACTSHEET or PREVIEW from the VIEW menu, to leave TEST SHOT.

Subsequent images you take will be recorded on the PCMCIA card in the

camera.

Since it is possible that you may inadvertently leave the camera in T^EST

SHOT (resulting in lost pictures that you believe are being recorded), the

driver provides several visual indicators that you are in T^ESTSHOT.

1. When you take another picture, if you have not “kept” the previous

one, a warning message is displayed, indicating that the first image

was not saved and reminding you that the camera is in T^ESTSHOT.

2. The text “T^ESTSHOT” appears in the window title bar along with the

camera name.

3. The C^OPYTO button becomes the KEEP button.

While in T^ESTSHOT you can:

Take another picture.

Click the ACQUIRE button to acquire the image into Photoshop.

Click the KEEP button to save the image to the PCMCIA card in the

camera.

Determine that you are satisfied with the testing, and choose CONTACT

SHEET or PREVIEW from the VIEW menu. Subsequent images you take are

stored to the PCMCIA card in the camera.

NOTE: You cannot record sound while in TEST SHOT.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C. Photoshop Menus

Two Photoshop menus — EDIT and SELECT — are active when you are in

the driver.

Photoshop EDIT Menu

You can use the CUT, COPY, PASTE, and CLEAR items from the Photoshop EDIT

menu with annotation text; however, you can not cut, copy, paste, or

clear selected images with these commands.

Photoshop SELECT menu

You can use the ALL and NONE items from the Photoshop SELECT menu.

ALL

Selects “all” images on the contact sheet including images that have

scrolled out of view in the image area of the driver image window; if you

scroll the image window, you see that all images are selected. If you are

working in the annotation window, A^LLselects all text in the window.

It is important to realize that A^LLchooses images from the PCMCIA card in

the camera or archive folder, not just images visible in the driver image

window. For example, suppose you choose A^LLand then click DELETE.

These actions not only delete the thumbnails from computer memory, but

in addition, these actions delete all images from their source (C^AMERAor

F^OLDER).

NOTE: The ALL choice from the Select menu performs the same function as the All

button on the driver image window.

N^ONE

Deselects all selected images. (This choice deselects all images, but does

not deselect text when you are within the annotation window.)

8-12

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D. ACQUIRE AS Menu

The ACQUIRE AS menu choices work in concert with the ACQUIRE button,

and determine whether selected images are acquired as pages of contact

sheets (choose C^ONTACTSHEET), or whether selected images are each

acquired into a separate Photoshop window (choose P^HOTO). These

choices affect only acquired images and do not affect the display of the

driver image window. Since P^HOTOis the simpler choice, it is described

first below.

Photo

If PHOTO is chosen, the driver creates a new Photoshop document for each

selected thumbnail; each document contains an image at the resolution

specified in the preferences.

CONTACT SHEET

If CONTACT SHEET is chosen, the driver generates one or more Photoshop

windows, each displaying thumbnails. The thumbnails on the contact

sheet document consist of the set of thumbnails selected while in C^ONTACT

SHEET view in the driver image window.

The following general characteristics apply to all contact sheets.

Each thumbnail is centered inside a square “slide surround.”

The rotation of each image matches its display in the driver image

window.

As many thumbnails as possible are placed on a sheet; the size of

each thumbnail is determined by the preferences described below.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If all selected images do not fit on a single contact sheet, multiple

contact sheets are created.

8-14

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACQUIRE CONTACT SHEET Dialog

With CONTACT SHEET as the selected ACQUIRE AS option, when you click the

A^CQUIREbutton, the ACQUIRE CONTACT SHEET dialog is displayed. Use its

options to establish the characteristics of the acquired contact sheet

document.

DOCUMENT NAME

When a contact sheet is acquired, the name of the resulting document is

determined from this entry, with “–n” appended, where “n” is the number

of the contact sheet. For example, if three contact sheet documents are

required to display the thumbnails and you have entered the D^OCUMENT

NAME Friday’s shoot, then the documents would be named Friday’s shoot-

1, Friday’s shoot-2, and Friday’s shoot-3. Additionally, the caption field of

the Photoshop file information for the document contains the same text.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

O^UTPUTRESOLUTION

Specify the resolution (in inches or centimeters as set in the general

preferences) you desire for the acquired contact sheets. Specify a resolu-

tion to match your printer.

SIZE (THUMBNAILS)

Select from these sizes which control the size — SMALL, MEDIUM, or LARGE

— of the thumbnail on the acquired contact sheet.

NOTE: These settings are different from a similar setting on the driver image

window which controls the size of thumbnails displayed in the driver image

window.

S^HOWCROP RECTANGLE (THUMBNAILS)

Click this feature “on” (an X appears in the check box to the left of this

option when on), to superimpose the cropping rectangle (if present) on

each acquired thumbnail.

PRINTABLE AREA WIDTH and HEIGHT

Specify the WIDTH and HEIGHT (in inches or centimeters as set in the

general preferences) desired for the printable area of the acquired contact

sheets.

CANCEL

Exits the dialog box, canceling changes you may have made to the

choices in the box. No contact sheets are acquired.

Exits the dialog box, saving any changes you have made to options in the

box (the current settings are saved from one work session to the next), and

generates the contact sheets as Photoshop pages.

8-16

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E. Take Picture Icon

Causes the camera to take a picture and display it in the driver image

window. There may be a very short delay to allow the camera to focus (if

supported by the camera).

To take a picture with this icon the camera must be connected to your

computer, the S^OURCEmust be CAMERA, and the camera must be on.

Since lighting, rotation, cropping, and naming data are maintained with

each image, the driver must assign initial values for these settings to every

new image when the image is displayed in the driver image window.

Refer to S^OURCEMenu, CAMERA in this chapter for an explanation of these

starting values.

NOTES: You can not take a picture while the camera is accessing a PCMCIA card,

that is while the red camera light indicates activity on the PCMCIA card. There-

fore, you should not take pictures while images are being saved to archive files.

F. Camera Control Icon

This icon is active only when a camera is attached to the computer;

otherwise, it is dim.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When you click the camera control icon, the following dialog box ap-

pears, allowing you to perform utility functions on the attached camera or

on a PCMCIA card in the camera.

The top lines of the dialog box display the camera name, camera serial

number, firmware (the instructions in the camera that control its opera-

tion) version, and the current date and time stored on the attached cam-

era. The date and time are displayed in local format; the time appears in a

24-hour format.

NOTE: These data may be different from similar data displayed in the image

information window. The data in this dialog box pertains to the camera currently

connected to your computer, and not necessarily to the camera used to take the

images you are viewing in the driver image window.

8-18

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOAD CAMERA FIRMWARE

Click this button to update the firmware in the attached camera. Firm-

ware, the control programming for the camera, is stored in nonvolatile

camera memory. Firmware controls most of the features of the camera.

Before clicking this button, be sure that the camera has a full charge; if it

does not, you may see a message asking you to use the AC battery

charger/adapter and to wait for several minutes. Follow these instructions

and wait (to allow the battery to charge) before clicking this button again.

When you click the L^OADCAMERA FIRMWARE button, the driver looks for a

“BIN” file (a file whose name ends in “BIN”), which must be installed as

described in the chapter “Preparing the Camera and the Computer.” The

contents of the file are transferred from your computer hard disk into the

nonvolatile memory in the camera. An error message is displayed if the

required “BIN” file is not found.

This feature allows you to keep the firmware in the camera up-to-date

without sending the camera to a service center. For example, if an up-

grade to the firmware becomes available and you obtain that upgrade

(refer to the appendix “Upgrading Your KODAK Software Driver”), you

can copy that new firmware into the camera with this command. It also

allows you to replace the firmware in the camera with the current version

if the camera exhibits unexpected behavior (such as unusual characters

on the camera back liquid crystal display).

IMPORTANT: If you obtain an updated copy of the BIN file, keep only the most

current version installed on your computer hard disk. This ensures that the current

BIN file is used should you update the camera firmware.

If you are working with a camera that does not currently have a PCMCIA card

installed, updating camera firmware deletes the image in camera memory if one is

present.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

After you download firmware, the camera needs one picture to recalibrate

the imager. For this reason the first picture you take after downloading

firmware may not be optimal.

SET CLOCK

When you click the SET CLOCK button, the current date and time are

automatically retrieved from your computer system clock and copied to

the camera. The date and time (in 24-hour format) are maintained in the

camera back by the battery.

Each image is date and time-stamped when made. These data appear in

the driver image window image information area for the selected image.

NOTE: If the date or time are not displayed correctly at the top of the CAMERA

CONTROL dialog box, and if clicking SET CLOCK does not correct the problem, make

sure that your computer system clock is set accurately; then click the S^ETCLOCK

button again.

ERASE

Click this button to erase the PCMCIA card in the camera. This is the

same as selecting all images in the driver image window when C^AMERAis

the source and then clicking the D^ELETEbutton.

You may be able to recover images deleted with this button; refer to

R^ECOVERbelow for details.

FORMAT

Click this button to format the PCMCIA card in the camera. This action is

similar to formatting a floppy diskette or hard disk on your computer

system. Existing images (and all other data) on the card are permanently

removed and cannot be recovered.

8-20

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have unexplainable problems with the PCMCIA card (perhaps you

are losing images, or you see an “E” followed by a single digit, for ex-

ample “E2,” on the camera back LCD), acquire or save all images from

the card if possible, then click this button to reformat the PCMCIA card —

all images are lost — and try the card again.

RECOVER

Click this button to recover images deleted from a PCMCIA card in the

camera. The images you recover may have been previously deleted with:

The DELETE button on the outside of the camera back.

The DELETE button in the software driver image window.

The ERASE button on the CAMERA CONTROL dialog box of the software

driver.

You cannot use this option to recover images that were deleted when you

formatted the card with the F^ORMATbutton.

When you click the R^ECOVERbutton, every image location on the card is

examined. The most recent image that was in each location is recovered.

The following examples explain the action of this button.

Example 1. Suppose that you have taken ten pictures and then deleted

one. If you recover the PCMCIA card before you take any additional

pictures, you will have all ten images — the original nine images will still

be there, and you will have recovered the tenth image.

Example 2. Suppose that you have taken ten pictures, have deleted

three, and taken another picture. In this case, the newest picture over-

writes one of the deleted images. If you recover the PCMCIA card, you

will have ten images — the nine original images, plus the latest picture

you have taken. The exact location of the overwritten deleted image

cannot be predetermined. The picture you deleted that was overwritten

with a new image cannot be recovered.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example 3. Suppose that you have filled the PCMCIA card with images,

and erased all images by clicking E^RASEor by selecting all images in the

driver image window and then clicking the D^ELETEbutton. If you recover

the disk with this button before you take any additional pictures you will

have recovered all of the images you erased.

Example 4. Suppose that you begin with a blank PCMCIA card. Over

time you have taken pictures, erased the disk, taken more pictures,

deleted some, taken additional pictures, and so on — never having more

than 20 images on the PCMCIA card. As you take new pictures while

there are still active images on the PCMCIA card, the new images are

written into an empty location on the PCMCIA card; deleted images that

are overwritten become unrecoverable. Suppose you now delete all

images by clicking the E^RASEbutton and take three new pictures; the three

new images will overwrite three images on the PCMCIA card. The exact

location of the overwritten images cannot be predetermined. If you

recover the PCMCIA card, you will recover 20 images. The three new

images will be there plus 17 of the most recent 20 images.

SELF TEST

Click this button to perform a diagnostic self-test of the camera. Messages

inform you of the outcome of the self-test. These data can be helpful for

identifying problems before you call Kodak for service.

DONE

Click this button to close the CAMERA CONTROL dialog box.

8-22

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G. Preferences Icon

You set the parameters used in the driver by clicking the Preferences icon,

which displays the P^REFERENCESpanel.

Default Acquire Resolution

Provides the resolution in pixels-per-inch or pixels-per-cm of an acquired

image. The value you enter here is sent to Photoshop with an image when

acquired and becomes the R^ESOLUTIONof the image (in the IMAGE SIZE

dialog box of the Photoshop IMAGE menu).

NOTE: If you choose the F^IXEDSIZE option in the CROP dialog box, a

different resolution is established and overrides the setting here.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-BIT ACQUIRE

When “on,” (an “X” appears to the left of this choice when on) provides

12-bit color support into Photoshop.

The camera captures images in 12-bit color for each of the red, green,

and blue planes. However, supported versions of Photoshop receive

images in either 8-bit per color format (24-bits per image) or 16-bit per

color format (48-bits per image).

When this option is off, the driver fits the 12-bits per color from the

camera to the 8-bit per color Photoshop format with limited loss of

luminance or color data. The full resolution of the file is preserved.

When this option is on, the driver expands the 12-bits per color from the

camera to the 16-bits per color Photoshop format. When on, acquiring an

image requires more time and RAM than when off. When on, you have

the full 12-bit dynamic range formatted to 16-bit for precise adjustments.

You must still change the data to 8-bits per color plane for printing,

export, and so on.

SHOW TOOL TIPS

When “on,” (an “X” appears to the left of this choice when on) a one- or

two-word help tag appears near each item in the driver image window

when the mouse rests over the item. These provide help in understanding

the purpose of each item in the window. When off the tags do not appear.

UNITS: INCHES/CENTIMETERS

Select the desired units — used at several places throughout the software.

8-24

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACQUIRED CONTACT SHEET LAYOUT

Use these settings to control the appearance of the BACKGROUND, slide

surround (S^LIDEMOUNT), and TEXT caption colors of acquired contact sheets

(not the contact sheet of the driver image window). Click a color patch to

change that color. You can also turn off either the S^LIDEMOUNT or TEXT

caption by deselecting the corresponding checkbox; with both off, and

with a black background, the effect is like contact sheets printed from

film.

FACTORY SETTINGS

Restores all settings on this panel to their “factory” default values.

CANCEL

Exits from the dialog box, canceling changes you may have made to any

of the settings.

Exits from the dialog box, saving all changes you have made to any

setting.

H. Rename Images Icon

When you click this icon, a RENAME dialog box appears that allows you to

name or rename the set of selected images. The new names are only

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

retained for images that you have archived, for images that you are about

to archive in this work session, or for images you are about to acquire in

this work session. This excludes images on the PCMCIA card, for the new

names are not written out to the PCMCIA card.

All values you enter on this dialog box are saved from session to session

so that you are not required to re-enter common information each time

this dialog box is opened.

NAME

Type a name into the NAME area of this dialog box. The characters you

type become the first portion of the image name for all of the selected

images. Since the characters you type become part of the computer

filenames of the images (if you archive them with the C^OPYTO command),

you should only use characters in the N^AMEarea that are allowable in

filenames any computer system on which you may read these files.

SEQUENCE NUMBER: DIGITS and STARTING FROM

The values you place in the SEQUENCE NUMBER area determine characters

that are appended to the end of the name you type in the N^AMEarea of this

8-26

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

dialog box. You supply a one-character number in the DIGITS field, a value

from 1 to 9. You also supply a one- or two-character number in the

S^TARTINGFROM field, a value from 0 to 99. If you have selected only one

image before clicking the Rename Images icon, the D^IGITSand STARTING

FROM text boxes are disabled.

EXAMPLE

The EXAMPLE shows you how the first image will be renamed based on the

data you have entered in the text boxes on this dialog box. Notice that the

characters “.TIF” are appended automatically to the filename.

RENAME

When you click the RENAME button, the driver renames all selected images.

If an image on this contact sheet already has the name you are trying to

assign to another image, a dialog box appears indicating that a file with

this name already exists in the folder. On this dialog box, click:

CANCEL to discontinue renaming this and subsequent images (previ-

ously renamed images retain their new names).

SKIP to ignore the current image, but rename the subsequent images.

(No sequence number is missed, the next image receives the se-

quence number that would have been used for this image.)

CONTINUE if you have entered a “new” name. The new name is used

for this one file, and subsequent files are renamed with the “old”

name.

CANCEL

Click CANCEL to close this dialog box without making any changes to the

names of selected images.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I. Rotate Clockwise/Counterclockwise Icons

When you click one of the rotation icons, selected images are rotated 90

degrees in the direction of the arrow on the icon. Each time you click a

rotate button the selected images rotate an additional 90 degrees in the

chosen direction.

The orientation of new images matches the orientation of the most re-

cently rotated image.

J. Crop Icon

Introduction

You click the Crop icon to establish cropping parameters for selected

images. This section presents an overview of the crop feature, and then

the entire C^ROPdialog box is explained in detail in the next section.

When you crop images from archive files or from the PCMCIA card in the

camera, the size of the images at their source is not reduced; the full

image is always maintained. Instead of reducing file size, the results of

your cropping activity is a cropping rectangle that is stored with the

image, and that is displayed over the image in any view. For example, if

you take a new image, then establish a cropping rectangle for it, and then

archive the image, the entire image is saved as is the cropping data.

8-28

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

After you have established a cropping rectangle for an image (whether an

image on a PCMCIA card in the camera, or an archive image, or a test

shot image), when the image is acquired into Photoshop, the crop rect-

angle is applied to the image data. Only the image area within the crop

rectangle you have established is acquired. This means that image acqui-

sition is faster, and that the acquired image is smaller than a full-size

image.

You can apply cropping rectangles to one image at a time or to multiple

images simultaneously. If you select multiple images before clicking the

Crop icon, the selection rectangle you create is applied to all of the

selected images. To apply different cropping to different images, do not

select multiple images before clicking the Crop icon; instead, select and

crop each image independently.

Once you have cropped image(s) and left the crop dialog box, you can

change the cropping by selecting the image(s), clicking the Crop icon, and

making the desired changes. However, if multiple images were selected

that do not all have the same crop rectangle, a message appears allowing

you to: remove existing cropping data and revise cropping for all selected

images; or cancel cropping, leaving the cropping data unchanged on the

multiple images.

NOTE: You can not simultaneously crop multiple images from different camera

types. The DCS 410, DCS 420, and EOS•DCS 5 are the same camera type; the

NC2000e and EOS•DCS 3 are the same camera type; and the DCS 460, DCS

465, and EOS•DCS 1 are the same camera type.

A checkbox on the crop dialog box allows you to apply the current crop

rectangle to future images you take. This can be helpful in a studio setting

in which a newly established cropping rectangle can be applied to a

series of subsequent images.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Crop Dialog Box

You provide image cropping information with the CROP dialog box that

appears when you click the Crop icon.

Stack indicates that

multiple images

will be cropped.

If no cropping has been applied previously to this image, drag a rectangle

around the area of the image you want cropped. If previous cropping has

been defined, that cropping rectangle is shown superimposed on top of

the image displayed in this dialog box. Move and reshape the crop

rectangle as described next.

8-30

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M^ETHOD: FREEFORM AND FIXED SIZE

Two cropping methods are supported. FREEFORM is the correct choice for

most cropping activity, while F^IXEDSIZE is appropriate when you know

beforehand the exact output dimensions desired for the image. Make one

of these choices:

Click FREEFORM to reshape the crop rectangle by dragging any edge of

the selection rectangle in any direction as desired.

Click FIXED SIZE, and establish a fixed size for the crop rectangle in the

dialog box that appears. This rectangle can also be reshaped, although

a fixed aspect ratio will be applied to the resultant rectangle. The

driver will adjust the resolution to accommodate the new rectangle.

In either case, when the cursor is moved inside the cropping rectangle it

changes to a hand cursor to allow you to repositioning the entire rect-

angle.

When you switch between these two, previous cropping data are lost, and

a new crop rectangle is established.

SIZE

The SIZE button is enabled only when the METHOD is FIXED SIZE. Enter the

final output size desired for the selected images, in units— either inches

or centimeters — as established in the preferences.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

After you enter values, when you click OK, a crop rectangle is centered

on the image with pixel dimensions equivalent to the product of the

default resolution (a preference setting) and the final output dimensions

you entered in the FINAL OUTPUT SIZE dialog box. If this calculation yields a

result that is larger than the pixel dimensions of the image, the driver

reduces the resolution. To change the size of the final output while F^IXED

SIZE is on, click the SIZE button again and change the WIDTH and/or HEIGHT

values.

As the crop rectangle is re-sized, the output resolution will be recalcu-

lated to maintain the final output size, where the resolution equals the

number of pixels divided by the dimensions (in inches or centimeters).

LEFT, TOP, WIDTH, and HEIGHT

Type values into these text boxes to establish absolute numeric values in

pixels for the top left corner (the origin point) of the selection rectangle,

and — when the M^ETHODis FREEFORM — for the width and height of the

rectangle.

The W^IDTHand HEIGHT text boxes can be used with either FREEFORM or FIXED

SIZE. They indicate pixels that will be in the acquired image. (They do not

control output size; use the W^IDTHand HEIGHT text boxes on the FINAL

OUTPUT SIZE dialog box described above to control output size.)

FIX ASPECT RATIO

If you turn “on” this checkbox (an X appears in the check box to the left of

this option when on), the driver holds the width and height in proportion

while you adjust the dimensions of the cropping rectangle. When on, if

you drag an edge of the cropping rectangle, the driver applies the update

to both dimensions of the crop box, keeping the aspect ratio in propor-

tion. A graphic of a small link appears to the right of the W^IDTHand HEIGHT

fields when the option is on.

NOTE: When FIXED SIZE is selected, FIXED ASPECT RATIO is always on.

8-32

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F^INALOUTPUT

The data displayed by the values in the final output area provide the

width, height, resolution, and file size of the cropped area of the images.

REMOVE

Removes the cropping rectangles from all selected images.

CANCEL

Exits the dialog box, canceling changes you may have made to all op-

tions.

Exits the dialog box, accepting all changes made to all options.

IMPORTANT: If multiple images were selected before cropping, clicking OK

applies the selected crop parameters to all selected images.

C^ROPNEW IMAGES AFTER SHUTTER RELEASE

If you turn “on” this checkbox (an X appears in the check box to the left of

this option when on), the most recent cropping rectangle that you have

created is superimposed on all new images you take; when “off,” no

cropping rectangle is applied to new images.

Navigation Buttons

If you select multiple images before you click the Crop icon, any changes

to the crop rectangle applies to all of the selected images. For this reason,

the C^ROPdialog box provides navigation buttons (identical in function to

those in the driver image window), which appear beneath the image. You

click these navigation buttons (first, previous, next, and last) to scroll

through the selected images; the current cropping rectangle appears on

each image as you scroll through them. This allows you to determine if

the cropping rectangle you have created provides the desired cropping

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

action for all of the selected images. You can also type a specific image

number in the navigation edit ‘go to’ box in the middle of the navigation

bar to display that image. When you click OK the current cropping

rectangle is applied to all images in the selection set.

K. Lighting Menu

These options apply only to color images, and not to images taken with

monochrome camera models. The lighting menu provides a simple, direct

method of quickly applying one of several lighting choices to your image.

Then later, once the image has been acquired, you can refine it if needed

in Photoshop.

NOTES: In addition to the choices on this menu, the driver provides a click-

balance lighting tool described in the next section. Lighting can be set with either

lighting option. However, lighting choices are mutually exclusive; you cannot

apply one type of lighting and then refine it with another. Instead, each time you

apply any color balancing, your previous choice is lost, and only the current

lighting setting is applied.

Click-balance is always the preferred method of applying color balancing to

images. If you have applied click-balance to an image, you must turn it off (as

described in the next section), before you can apply a choice from this lighting

menu.

After selecting images, you should select an option from the lighting menu

to correspond to the original lighting conditions under which you made

the images. Choices are D^AYLIGHT, TUNGSTEN, FLUORESCENT, and FLASH. The

option you select is stored with the images on the PCMCIA card in the

8-34

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

camera or with the selected image archive files. Changes you make in

these settings are visible on the images displayed on your computer

monitor.

The choice you make is used for color correction by the driver when the

image is acquired. The menu provides the following choices.

D^AYLIGHT

Uses daylight color-correction values when acquiring the

image.

T^UNGSTEN

Uses tungsten color-correction values when acquiring the

image.

NOTE: The Tiffen Hot Mirror filter is always recommended when

shooting under tungsten lighting. A filter for one size lens is

supplied; filters for other size lenses are available. Without the

filter, color results may not be very accurate with a tungsten light

source; however, acceptable color rendition can be obtained with

this filter under tungsten lighting.

FLUORESCENT Uses fluorescent color-correction values when acquiring the

image.

Flash

Uses flash color-correction values when acquiring the

image.

L. Click-Balance Tool

Unlike the lighting menu which provides distinct choices to match

lighting conditions under which the image was made, the click-balance

tool provides a more refined method of color balancing, and is always the

preferred method of applying color balancing to images

The ‘checkbox’ appears on the left of the tool, and the ‘eyedropper’ is on

the right.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NOTE: In addition to this tool, the driver provides a lighting menu described in

the last section. Lighting can be set with either lighting option. However, lighting

choices are mutually exclusive; you cannot apply one type of lighting and then

refine it with another. Instead, each time you apply any color balancing, your

previous choice is lost, and only the current lighting setting is applied. Click-

balance is always the preferred method of applying color balancing to images.

You use this tool to set color balancing for a single image (selected or

unselected) or for a set of selected images. This icon provides an addi-

tional type of color balancing to those provided on the lighting menu

described in the last section. This feature is always the preferred option for

color balancing an image.

To activate this feature, first click its checkbox “on” (an X appears in the

check box to the left of this option when on). Then, when you move the

cursor over an image in any view (C^ONTACTSHEET, PREVIEW, or TEST SHOT),

the cursor changes to an eyedropper cursor.

You then click the eyedropper on an area of the image that is white or

light gray (an area that is not overexposed), or click a point that should be

white or light gray. White balance values for the entire image are calcu-

lated based on averaging a 16 x 16 pixel square around the point at

which you have clicked.

After that single click, the eyedropper cursor is no longer available,

although the click-balance tool remains on. If the adjustment was not

satisfactory, click the cursor on the eyedropper portion of the click-

balance tool; this changes the cursor to the eyedropper cursor again. Then

click another point in the image. Repeat the process as needed

When using the click-balance tool, we suggest that you view the image

you want to balance in P^REVIEWview, since it displays a larger image and

therefore allows you to find a click point more easily. With the image you

want displayed in P^REVIEWview, move the cursor to a white or light gray

8-36

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

area where each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) color values

displayed below the image are as high as possible, but lower than 255.

After you click, you view the result of the change immediately on the

image.

To apply the same click-balance settings to multiple images at the same

time, select the images from the contact sheet, and then view them in

PREVIEW, where they appear as a stack of images. Now when you click-

balance the top image, the color balancing resulting from your actions is

applied to all of the selected images in the stack and is stored with all of

the images. Use the navigation tool to move through the stack of pre-

viewed images to ensure that the color balancing is appropriate for all

images.

You can change the click-balance point by repeating the procedures

described above and clicking a different point; or you can remove the

click-balance setting for one or more images by selecting them and

clicking the click-balance checkbox “off.”

NOTES: When you click, you may see a message indicating that ONE OF THE COLORS

IS SATURATED, AND ASKING YOU TO CLICK ANOTHER POINT FOR BALANCING. As prompted,

click another point.

If there is no white or light gray area in the image, take a photograph of a neutral

gray or white card (for example KODAK Gray Cards, Publication No. R-27) under

the same lighting conditions that existed when the image was taken. Then select

the image of the card as well as all other images taken under the same lighting

conditions. Follow the procedures described above to set a click-balance point,

however, to set the correct value, click the special cursor on the image of the

card, rather than one of the other images.

The checkbox for this tool may contain a minus sign “–” instead of being blank or

containing an “X.” The minus sign appears when you have selected multiple

images and they do not all have the same lighting settings.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M. Sound Menu

All

Sound 1

Sound 2

•

You use this Sound menu to play sounds associated with a single selected

image. When you click the sound menu icon, one of several things occur:

If a single sound file was recorded with the image, it is played through

your computer speakers.

If multiple sound files were recorded at this point, a menu appears

with the choice A^LLand with each sound listed (named SOUND 1,

S^OUND2, and so on). Select ALL to play all of the sounds in sequence,

or select an individual item from the menu to play its sound.

The driver image window presents a visual indication that you recorded a

sound file with the camera. A single small sound icon appears above the

upper right corner of the image you took before recording sound.

When the image is copied to a folder, the sound files associated with the

image are also copied, with each separate recording becoming a separate

file on your computer hard disk.

On a PC, sound files are recorded as “.WAV” files.

8-38

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

N. ACQUIRE Button

You click the ACQUIRE button to acquire selected images or a contact sheet

into Photoshop; the setting of the A^CQUIREAS menu determines what is

acquired:

If the ACQUIRE AS menu is set to PHOTO (or the view is TEST SHOT), then

each selected image opens into a separate Photoshop window. Your

annotation (if present) and the image information are acquired and

placed in the caption area of the Photoshop file information field.

If the ACQUIRE AS menu is set to CONTACT SHEET, then one or more

Photoshop documents is generated; the documents display a thumb-

nail of each of the images selected in the driver image window. Refer

to “A^CQUIREAS Menu” in this chapter for complete details.

Acquiring images or contact sheets does not affect images at their source.

You can also double-click the image(s) or preview as an alternate to the

two-step process of selecting an image and then clicking the A^CQUIRE

button.

IMPORTANT: If you have not made any changes to the acquired image while in

Photoshop, and you click the close box of the acquired image window or choose

C^LOSEfrom the Photoshop FILE menu or quit Photoshop, the window will close

without asking you if you want to save it. Therefore, be sure you save any

acquired images you do not want to lose before closing their windows or quitting

Photoshop.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

O. COPY TO Button

You click thIS button to copy highlighted images, and associated sound

files if any, to your computer hard disk. The S^OURCEcan be either CAMERA

or FOLDER.

When this button is clicked, a save dialog box appears. Each image file

and each sound file from the source becomes a separate file on your

computer hard disk. The filenames are generated by the driver unless you

have renamed the files (click the Rename icon) in which case your names

are used.

The D^ELETEORIGINALS option on the dialog box, if checked, deletes the

image files and associated sound files at their source after they are copied

to your computer hard disk. A confirmation box appears before the

images are deleted. (Deleted images include all selected images, even

those selected images that may have temporarily scrolled out of view in

the image area of the driver image window.)

Archive Image File Format

Images in these archive files created with the COPY TO button are com-

posed of uninterpolated data; they have not been “acquired” into

Photoshop. This means they contain the raw, native data generated from

the imager in the camera back. As a result, images you save to your

computer hard disk by clicking C^{OPY TO}should be read only with the

driver provided by Kodak. (See the IMPORTANT paragraph below).

In addition to complete image data, an image archive file includes: a

thumbnail, all text you have typed in the annotation area, camera settings

8-40

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

from the image information window, image naming data, image color

balance data, image cropping data, and image rotation data.

The Specifications appendix lists file sizes for these image files for your

camera.

IMPORTANT: Do not open image archive files (files that you create by copying

images to your computer hard disk with the C^OPYTO button) with Photoshop or

other image software and then resave the data with the same filename. The image

archive files you create with the C^OPYTO button contain several sections — one

section with a TIFF version of the thumbnail, and then another section with the

image data. When you open the file with Photoshop, only the TIFF thumbnail is

opened, and if saved, only the thumbnail is saved — not the image data. For this

reason, you should only open these files from within the driver image window

using the C^HOOSEFOLDER choice of the SOURCE menu as described in this chapter;

this ensures that you obtain the image data.

P. DELETE Button

You click the DELETE button to delete selected images from their source —

either the camera or an image archive file. A dialog box warns you that

images will be deleted. Selected images include images you have clicked

that may have temporarily scrolled out of view in the image area of the

driver image window.

NOTES: The DELETE button on the camera back does not function when the

camera is connected to a computer; use this D^ELETEbutton on the software driver

image window to delete images in this configuration.

You may be able to recover images you delete with this button; refer to the

“Recover” button section of this chapter.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Q. DONE Button

You click DONE to close the driver image window and return to

Photoshop. All changes — color balancing, annotation, cropping, rota-

tion, renaming of any image — you have made to images are saved with

the image when you click this button. (New names resulting from renam-

ing files are only saved to archive files, not to files on PCMCIA cards.)

R–S. Annotation Area and Image Information

Window

Annotation

Window

Image

Information

Window

When you select a single thumbnail while in contact sheet view, or when

you view a preview image or a test shot image, the annotation area and

image information window display information about the image.

8-42

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

You can type short descriptive material in the annotation area; then use

the mouse or arrow keys to move through text once entered. The text is

saved with the image on the PCMCIA card or in an archive file, but not

with a test shot image unless you save the image.

The image information window includes, from top to bottom: the camera

model that took the image, the camera serial number, the image width

and height (in pixels), the date and time (displayed in 24-hour format) the

image was made, and the image counter (the exposure number displayed

by the camera when the image was made).

The remaining information in the area depends on which camera was

used to take the selected picture. This information can include: ISO,

aperture, shutter speed, lens, and other settings such as the approximate

camera-to subject distance in meters (if supported by the camera and

lens).

The shutter speed and camera aperture are shown as they appear in the

camera LCD panel and viewfinder. The date and time are maintained by

the battery in the camera system. You update the date and time with the

S^ETCLOCK choice of the CAMERA CONTROL dialog box as described in this

chapter.

The text from the annotation area and the image information window are

obtained when you acquire the image into Photoshop. These data are

placed into the caption area of the file information for the image.

The number of character »in the annotation window plus the number of

characters in the image information window must total 255 or less. Some

cameras display more lines in the image information window than others;

for this reason, with some cameras you may not be able to fill the annota-

tion window with your text. However, you can delete some lines from the

image information window by clicking on the line (to select the entire

line), and pressing the keyboard delete key. This works to delete all lines

except: Camera; Serial #; Width; Height; Date; and Time.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T. Navigation Bar

First

Previous Go To

Last

The items in this area allow you to navigate through images. From left to

right the controls navigate you to images as follows: “first” image; “previ-

ous” image; type a number then click outside the box (or press the Enter

Key) to move to that specific image; “next” image; “last” image. These

controls work differently in C^ONTACTSHEET view and in PREVIEW/CROP.

CONTACT SHEET View

Suppose that you are working in CONTACT SHEET view with images con-

secutively numbered from 1-30, and that you have selected only image

number 5. In this situation clicking: “first” takes you to image 1; clicking

“previous” takes you to image 4; clicking “next” takes you to image 6,

and clicking “last” takes you to image 30.

Suppose that you are again working with images consecutively numbered

from 1-30, and that you have selected five images: 5, 10, 15, 20, and 25.

Now if you click one of the four navigation icons, all of the five selected

images are deselected and a single image is selected as follows. If you

click the “first” icon, image 1 is selected. If you click the “previous” icon,

image 4 is selected. If you click the “next” icon, image 26 is selected. If

you click the “last” icon, image 30 is selected.

PREVIEW View or CROP Dialog

In PREVIEW view when color balancing images, or in the CROP dialog, use

the navigation controls to move through only the subset of selected

8-44

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

images. For example if you are working with images consecutively

numbered from 1-30, and you have selected images 5, 10, 15, 20, and

25. Suppose that you are in preview or crop, and looking at image num-

ber 15. Now if you click the “first” icon, image 5 is selected. If you click

the “previous” icon, image 10 is selected. If you click the “next” icon,

image 20 is selected. If you click the “last” icon, image 25 is selected.

These icons are very important for moving through the selected subset of

images to ensure that the color balancing or cropping that you that you

are applying produces the desired effect with all of the subset of images.

U. Select All Icon

When you are working with images, clicking this icon selects all images

at their source (either the PCMCIA card in the camera or the archive

folder, depending on the current source); or when you are working in the

annotation window, selects all text. Performs the same function as choos-

ing A^LLin the Photoshop SELECT menu.

V. Number of Images Selected

This area shows the number of images currently selected out of the total

number of images at the source.

W. The X-Y Cursor Location

These values indicate the current X and Y pixel location (in the full image)

of the cursor as it moves over the image.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X. RGB Values at the Cursor Location

These indicate the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) values of the pixel at

the current cursor location

Y. Thumbnail/Preview Size Menu

This menu provides three sizes from which you can choose the desired

viewing size for thumbnails or previews. These settings only affect the

image size displayed on your monitor; they do not affect the size of the

image at its source or the size of the image acquired.

The exact size of the thumbnails in pixels depends on the camera and the

printer resolution specified in the contact sheet preferences panel.

You can choose a small size when navigating through images, and then a

large size to view the detail of an image or to perform color balancing.

Small sizes load faster than larger sizes.

8-46

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using Photoshop “Actions”

(Macintosh Only)

The driver supports the Actions feature of Photoshop version 4.0 and later.

There are a number of considerations to keep in mind while working with

actions.

You cannot initiate or terminate a script in the driver. Instead, you

must start recording before you enter the driver, and you must stop

recording after you leave the driver, when back in Photoshop.

While in the driver, actions can be recorded while in CONTACT SHEET or

P^REVIEW, but not while in TEST SHOT view.

When appropriate, the action applies to the selected image or images

(by their image number, not name).

The driver image window is not displayed during action playback.

As with all actions, you can view the commands recorded by the

driver; this can help you understand how the driver produces actions.

The same action can record differently depending on the state of the

driver when you begin recording; however, the actions should per-

form the same.

As with any scripting, you may need to experiment to ensure that you

are obtaining the desired results with driver actions.

Several examples of the use of actions with the driver image window

follow.

Example-1: You want a script to acquire all images from a PCMCIA card

in the connected camera.

1. Start recording a new action script.

2. Select the driver; you enter the driver image window.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Click the Select All icon.

4. Select P^HOTOfrom the ACQUIRE AS menu.

5. Click the A^CQUIREbutton.

6. Click the D^ONEbutton; you leave the driver image window.

7. Stop recording the script; you see these commands.

Example-2: You want to acquire a contact sheet for all images in a spe-

cific folder; perhaps your regular image archive folder.

1. Start recording the new action script.

2. Select the driver; you enter the driver image window.

3. Navigate to the desired folder.

4. Click the Select All icon.

5. Select C^ONTACTSHEET from the ACQUIRE AS menu.

6. Click the A^CQUIREbutton.

7. Make choices on the A^CQUIREDCONTACT SHEET dialog box; click OK.

8. Click D^ONEto close the driver image window.

8-48

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. Stop recording the script; you see these commands.

Supported Commands

The driver image window supports Photoshop action recording of the

following driver commands.

Select a SOURCE of CAMERA or FOLDER. If you have several different

cameras at your site, a source of C^AMERAselects whichever camera is

currently connected to the computer. The F^OLDERchoice records the

path to the folder you select while recording the action.

Rotate images clockwise or counterclockwise.

Click the Take Picture icon; however, a shutter release is not re-

corded.

Select a lighting setting of DAYLIGHT, TUNGSTEN, FLUORESCENT, or FLASH.

Establish a crop rectangle. This records the crop rectangle in pixels.

When Fixed Size is chosen, that fact is recorded as well as the crop

rectangle, the height and width, and the resolution.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enter annotation text. This records the text and the image for which it

is recorded.

Acquire as a PHOTO or a CONTACT SHEET.

ACQUIRE button.

ACQUIRE CONTACT SHEET records the settings from this dialog box.

Save preferences settings.

Rename images. Records the name, number of digits, and starting

digit for selected images.

DELETE images.

Archive images with COPY TO. Saves selected images to the designated

folder; also records the D^ELETEORIGINALS setting.

Detect a click on the first or last image as targeting the “first” or “last”

image; a click on another image is targeted on that actual image

number.

Use click-balance tool. This records the X-Y location on the image

you clicked, as well as the actual image numbers of other selected

images as defined at their source. Targeting is used to identify images

as described in the previous paragraph.

Driver Commands Not Supported

The following driver commands are not recorded.

ERASE the PCMCIA card in the camera.

FORMAT the PCMCIA card in the camera.

LOAD CAMERA FIRMWARE.

RECOVER the PCMCIA card in the camera.

SELF TEST of the camera.

SET CLOCK.

TEST SHOT view.

Play all sound files or sound files by number.

A shutter release is not recorded, although clicking TAKE PICTURE is

recorded.

8-50

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting —

KODAK Driver Software

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

The driver choice does not The driver has not been

Quit Photoshop, install the driver

as described in Chapter 4, run

Photoshop and try again.

appear on the Acquire

submenu.

installed, or has not

been installed properly.

The time and/or date for

an image(s) is incorrect.

The computer system

clock from which the

clock in the camera was

set, contained an

incorrect time and/or

date.

Reset the computer system clock.

Connect the camera to your

computer, run the driver, and reset

the clock in the camera using the

Set Clock choice on the Camera

Control panel.

The battery has been

dead for an extended

period (perhaps a month

or more) without

Recharge the camera battery with

the AC battery charger/adapter, and

then reset the clock in the camera

using the Set Clock choice on the

Camera Control panel.

recharging.

You are experiencing

erratic camera behavior or

unusual characters appear

on the camera back liquid

crystal display (LCD). You

know the battery is

The firmware in the

camera has become

corrupted.

Update camera firmware as

described earlier in this chapter.

charged.

All acquired images have a

consistent defect.

There is dirt or dust on

the imager.

Clean the imager as described in

“Cleaning the Imager” in

Chapter 7.

All acquired images have a

magenta spot in the center

of the image.

Some lenses may have a

hot spot, especially

noticeable when you

stop down.

Use a different lens or stop down

less (use a larger aperture).

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

An undesirable color shift

has occurred in saturated

colors.

The image has been

overexposed.

Under expose for proper color

saturation.

Acquired images have

random defects, or there is

other noise in the image.

The ISO setting is too

high.

Take the picture again with a lower

ISO.

You are using a SCSI

cable longer than those

supplied with the

camera.

Use only the supplied or specified

cables.

The exposure time is too

long.

Avoid long exposures. Exposures

of more than 4–5 seconds (and

occasionally more than 1/2

second) can produce noise in the

image.

Images are consistently too The gamma for your

Calibrate the gamma for your

monitor as explained in the Adobe

Photoshop manual.

light or too dark.

monitor is not calibrated

properly.

The computer crashes

when the camera is

attached.

There is a SCSI ID

conflict.

Reset the SCSI ID on the camera as

described in Chapter 4.

The computer crashes as

the camera is

disconnected.

You have disconnected

the camera from the

computer while the

computer is on.

The correct procedure is to shut

down the computer before

disconnecting the camera from the

computer.

8-52

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trouble

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

The battery has become

exhausted while the

When the camera is

connected to a computer

Recharge the battery in the camera

back.

camera is connected to the that is on, and the

We recommend that you operate

the camera from the AC battery

charger/adapter when connected to

a computer.

computer; the AC battery

charger/adapter is not

being used.

software driver window

is opened, the camera

will not go to sleep. This

can exhaust the battery if

it continues for an

extremely long period of

time (perhaps a month

or more) without

recharging.

You click the Take Picture

button, but no picture is

recorded.

The PCMCIA card in

camera is full (the disk

indicator is flashing).

Delete images from the PCMCIA

card, or use a different card if

available.

The camera is off.

Turn on the camera.

The camera is not

awake.

Wake the camera and try again.

You click the camera

shutter button but no

picture is recorded

The camera is off.

Turn on the camera.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Messages — KODAK Driver Software

The software driver designed by Kodak adds new messages to Photoshop.

An explanation of those messages — listed in alphabetical order —

follows.

NOTES: For an explanation of other Adobe Photoshop messages, refer to the

instructions for that product.

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“A camera hardware error

has been found. Verify

that SCSI cables are

A problem with the

camera hardware has

been detected.

Verify that all SCSI connections are

correct (if necessary turn off all

equipment to alter the

connected properly, and

that the camera has a

unique SCSI ID, and then

try again.”

connections), make sure the

camera has a unique SCSI ID, and

try again.

“A hardware error has

been found in the SCSI

cabling or connectors.

Verify that SCSI cables are

connected properly.”

A hardware error has

been detected in the

cabling or SCSI

Verify that all SCSI connections are

correct (if necessary turn off all

equipment to alter the

connections). Try other cables if

available. Be certain that

connectors.

terminators (if used with your

computer setup) are still properly

connected. Make sure terminator

power is enabled on your SCSI

card. If the problem persists,

contact Kodak.

“A hardware error has

occurred on an input-

output device (not the

camera).”

A hardware error was

detected while trying to

open or save an image to

a storage device.

Service the peripheral to determine

the cause of the problem.

8-54

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“A parity hardware error

has been found in the

cabling or in the camera

during image transfer.

Verify that SCSI cables are

connected properly.”

A hardware error has

been detected in the

cabling or in the camera.

Verify that all SCSI connections are

correct (if necessary turn off all

equipment to alter the

connections). Try other cables if

available. If the problem persists,

contact Kodak.

“A problem occurred

A problem occurred

when the software driver

tried to communicate

with the camera.

Try again; if the problem persists,

contact Kodak.

when the driver tried to

communicate with the

camera (the SCSI manager

is busy and cannot handle

the current request at this

time). Please try again.”

“A problem occurred

with the TWAIN driver,

and the matrix file

‘filename’ is not

compatible with the

current TWAIN driver.

Reinstall the driver and try

again.”

A problem occurred with Reinstall the TWAIN driver as

the software driver,

perhaps during

installation.

described in Chapter 4, and try

again.

If the problem persists, obtain a

new driver (refer to the appendix

“Updating Your KODAK Software

Driver”), install it, and try again.

“A problem with the

hardware has been

A problem with the

camera hardware has

been detected.

Verify that all SCSI connections are

correct (if necessary turn off all

equipment to alter the

connections), make sure the

camera has a unique SCSI ID, and

try again.

detected. (Timeout during

command phase.) Verify

that SCSI cables are

connected properly, and

that the camera has a

unique SCSI ID, and then

try again.”

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“A problem with the

hardware has been

A problem with the

camera hardware has

been detected.

Verify that all SCSI connections are

correct (if necessary turn off all

equipment to alter the

connections), make sure the

camera has a unique SCSI ID, and

try again.

detected. (Timeout during

data phase.) Verify that

SCSI cables are connected

properly, and that the

camera has a unique SCSI

ID, and then try again.”

“A problem with the

hardware has been

A problem with the

camera hardware has

been detected.

Verify that all SCSI connections are

correct (if necessary turn off all

equipment to alter the

connections), make sure the

camera has a unique SCSI ID, and

try again.

detected. (Timeout during

message phase.) Verify

that SCSI cables are

connected properly, and

that the camera has a

unique SCSI ID, and then

try again.”

“A problem with the

hardware has been

A problem with the

camera hardware has

been detected.

Verify that all SCSI connections are

correct (if necessary turn off all

equipment to alter the

connections), make sure the

camera has a unique SCSI ID, and

try again.

detected. (Timeout during

selection phase.) Verify

that SCSI cables are

connected properly, and

that the camera has a

unique SCSI ID, and then

try again.”

“A problem with the

hardware has been

A problem with the

camera hardware has

been detected.

Verify that all SCSI connections are

correct (if necessary turn off all

equipment to alter the

connections), make sure the

camera has a unique SCSI ID, and

try again.

detected. (Timeout during

status phase.) Verify that

SCSI cables are connected

properly, and that the

camera has a unique SCSI

ID, and then try again.”

8-56

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“A problem with the

hardware has been

detected. (Timeout

A problem with the

camera hardware has

been detected.

Verify that all SCSI connections are

correct (if necessary turn off all

equipment to alter the

waiting for initial bus free

phase.) Verify that SCSI

cables are connected

properly, and that the

camera has a unique SCSI

ID, and then try again.”

connections), make sure the

camera has a unique SCSI ID, and

try again.

“A SCSI error occurred.”

There may be one of a

variety of problems,

including loose or

incorrect cables,

Shut down the computer, turn off

the camera, and disconnect the

camera from the computer and the

AC battery charger/adapter. Check

all SCSI connections and cables.

improper SCSI

configuration, and so on. Reconnect your equipment, restart,

and try again.

“An item named

itemname already exists in archive folder, you have

While working with an

Click OK to replace the archive file

with the selected file; or click

this location. Do you

want to replace it with the

one you’re copying?”

selected an image, and

clicked “Copy To;”

however, an image with

this filename already

exists in the folder.

Cancel and no replacement occurs.

If you click OK, sound files are

replaced without notifying you.

“ASPI software for

A problem has occurred

with your software ASPI

manager for Windows.

Install, or reinstall, the ASPI

manager for Windows. This

software, which is not available

from Kodak, should be provided

with your ASPI Windows host

adapter card.

Windows has not been

initialized. Install or

reinstall the WINDOWS

ASPI software.”

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“Camera battery is low.

To continue working, use

the AC adapter.”

The battery needs

charging.

If you are operating without the AC

adapter but are in an environment

where power is available, attach

the adapter, wait for a short time

and try again.

If neither a power source nor an

adapter is available, you will not

be able to complete this operation.

We encourage you to charge the

battery for two hours before any

field operations.

NOTES: If the battery in the camera

is not sufficient for your needs,

consider obtaining a Quantum

Battery 5 (QB5). Kodak produces

an accessory cable that allows you

to attach the camera system to the

QB5. (Neither the QB5 nor the

cable accessory is supplied with

the camera system.)

“Camera firmware was

loaded successfully.”

You clicked Load

Camera Firmware; the

operation was successful.

Click OK; no other action is

required.

“Camera ‘Self Test’

completed successfully.”

The self test you initiated

completed successfully.

Click OK; no other action is

required.

“Camera ‘Self Test’ failed.

Click the ‘Load Camera

Firmware’ button and

then try the 'Self Test'

button again.”

An unspecified hardware

problem occurred.

Try again. If the problem

continues, load camera firmware,

and try again.

If you continue to have problems,

contact Kodak.

8-58

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“Can not acquire image

‘imageid’ because

‘reason.’”

This is a general purpose

message that occurs

when trying to acquire

images.

Respond appropriately. For

example, if the calibration (CAL)

file is missing, you must obtain the

file (it was supplied by Kodak with

the camera used for the picture)

and place it in the folder with the

image file.

For example you might

see this message when a

calibration (CAL) file is

not found for the image.

“Can not acquire this

contact sheet. The

As indicated, the driver

can not acquire this

contact sheet because

the dimensions specified

for the contact sheet are

too small.

Either increase the Width and/or

Height as needed of the Printable

Area and/or reduce the Thumbnail

Size; then try again.

Printable Area (Width and

Height) on the Acquire

Contact Sheet dialog box

is too small to hold even

one thumbnail of the

Thumbnail Size specified

on the dialog box.”

“Can not complete the

Copy To operation

because the disk is full.”

You are trying to save a

file that is larger than the

available space on the

selected disk.

Select another disk if available, or

delete files from this disk and try

again.

“Can not crop image

‘imageid’ because

‘reason.’”

This is a general purpose

message that occurs

when trying to crop

images.

Respond appropriately as suggested

by the specified reason.

“Can not load camera

firmware because the file

‘filename’ can not be

found. Make sure the file

is at the same location as

the driver file (reinstall the

driver if necessary).”

A file, perhaps the

“.BIN” file, was not

found in the same folder

as the driver file.

Place a copy of the “.BIN” file in

the same folder as the driver file.

The BIN file is supplied by Kodak

on the diskette with the product.

Or reinstall the driver.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“Can not load image

thumbnail.”

An unusual condition is

detected when trying to

access an image at its

source.

Try again; if the problem persists,

you may not be able to access this

image.

“Can not locate the SCSI

host adapter. Have a

technician install a

supported adapter, or

troubleshoot an installed

adapter.”

The driver does not find

the SCSI host adapter.

You must have a supported SCSI

host adapter installed to access

files from the camera. (Refer to the

read me for supported SCSI host

adapters.)

If necessary have a technician

install a board, or perform

troubleshooting on an

already installed board.

“Can not open image

‘imageid.’”

An unusual condition is

detected when trying to

access an image at its

source.

Try again; if the problem persists,

you may not be able to access this

image.

For example, suppose

that you are working

with the images from an

archive folder. This

message can occur if you

have the driver window

opened, and then you

leave the driver, remove

or delete one of the

images from the current

folder, return to the

driver, and then try to

work with the removed

or deleted image.

“Can not play sound file.” The sound file may be

corrupt.

If possible, record the sound again

and repeat the operation.

Otherwise, you may not be able to

play the sound.

8-60

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“Can not recognize the

PCMCIA card in the

camera.

This message occurs

when the driver opens

and is unable to read the

PCMCIA card in the

camera. A variety of

reasons can cause this

occurrence as described

below.

Remove and reinsert the PCMCIA

card, then try again.

Remove the card,

reinsert it firmly, and

try again.

Confirm that the

battery is charged.

The card is not inserted

properly in the camera.

Switch to an archive

folder.

The card may not be

formatted. To format

it, click the Camera

Control icon, then

click the Format

button.”

The battery needs

charging.

Attach the AC adapter and charge

the battery.

The PCMCIA card in the

camera is not DOS

formatted.

Click the Camera Control icon,

then click the Format button to

format the PCMCIA card. This

action permanently erases any files

on the card.

Or, if a second PCMCIA card that

is known to be DOS formatted is

available, replace the current

PCMCIA card with the second

card.

Work with an archive folder

instead of this problem PCMCIA

card.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“Can not recognize the

PCMCIA card in the

camera.

The card is not inserted

properly in the camera.

Remove and reinsert the PCMCIA

card, then try again.

Remove the card,

reinsert it firmly, and

try again.

Confirm that the

battery is charged.

The card may not be

formatted. To format

it, click the Camera

Control icon, then

click the Format

button.”

The battery needs

charging.

Attach the AC adapter and charge

the battery.

The PCMCIA card in the

camera is not DOS

formatted, or has

become corrupted after

the driver has

Click the Camera Control icon,

then click the Format button to

format the PCMCIA card. This

action permanently erases any files

on the card.

successfully accessed it.

Or, if a second PCMCIA card that

is known to be DOS formatted is

available, replace the current

PCMCIA card with the second

card.

“Can not save the

The system disk is full, or Create room on the system disk, or

Preferences file. The

system disk may be full,

or may be locked, or you

do not have ‘write

is locked, or is write

protected, or there is a

problem with the system

disk.

unlock the disk, or remove write

protection from the system disk, or

have the system disk repaired.

privileges’ to the disk.”

8-62

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“Can not save these

images because the

destination folder or disk

is locked, or you do not

have ‘write privileges’ to

the folder.”

A problem occurred

while writing the file. For

example, the disk is

locked, or write

protected, or there is

another problem with

the hard disk.

Unlock the disk, change write

protection, or write the file to

another disk if available.

“Can not ‘Take Picture.’

EOS-1 N is in ONE SHOT

focus mode and can not

focus.”

This is normal operation

of the camera.

Choose another focus mode or try

to focus on another part of the

subject that allows the camera to

focus.

“Can not ‘Take Picture.’

This message only

If you are working with an

applies to the DCS 465.

electrically tripped camera, wait for

the camera to complete the current

operation and then try again.

The camera back may

be busy.

The camera can not be

electrically tripped.”

Or if the camera can not be

electrically tripped, you can not

use the Take Picture button with

this camera. Instead you must trip

the camera manually.

“Can not ‘Take Picture.’

This is normal operation

of the camera.

If you are in S focus mode, choose

another focus mode or shoot from

another position that allows the

camera to focus.

The N90s may be in S

focus mode and can

not focus.

If you are in one of the

The N90s may be in P

exposure mode and its

lens is not stopped

down or could not

focus.”

programmed exposure modes, be

certain that you set the lens to its

smallest aperture and that the

camera can focus.

“Color balance can not be

applied to monochrome

images.”

An monochrome image

is selected for color

balancing; color

When click balancing, work only

with color images.

balancing can not be

applied to monochrome

images.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“Command failure:

unable to free resource

from global memory.

Restart your computer and

try again.”

A problem has occurred

with Windows.

Restart your computer and try

again.

If this does not resolve the

problem, obtain technical support

from your Windows supplier.

“Connect the adapter (if it

is not already connected),

and allow the adapter to

charge the camera for

The battery does not

have enough power to

update the camera

firmware.

Allow the camera battery to charge

for three minutes from the AC

battery charger/adapter, and then

click the Load Camera Firmware

button again.

three minutes before

clicking the Load Camera

Firmware button again.”

“Data transfer from the

camera to the computer

has been interrupted.

Verify that SCSI cables are

connected properly.”

There has been an

interruption in data

transfer between the

camera and the

computer.

Verify that the SCSI cable is

connected properly between the

camera and the computer. If not,

turn both off, reconnect them, and

try again.

“File Error: can not find

the file WINASPI.DLL.

Install or reinstall the

WINDOWS ASPI

The driver for ASPI is

installed, but an ASPI

compliant host adapter is it, and then try again.

not installed in the

Obtain an ASPI compliant host

adapter, have a technician install

software, and remove

other ASPI software if

possible.”

computer.

The TWAIN compliant

KODAK Driver for ASPI

is installed, as is an ASPI

compliant host adapter,

but the Windows ASPI

files that accompany the

ASPI compliant host

Install the Windows ASPI files that

accompany the ASPI compliant

SCSI host adapter, then try again.

If for some reason the Windows

ASPI files were not supplied with

your host adapter, contact the

source of the host adapter to

inquire about obtaining them.

adapter are not installed.

Even though you may have

installed ASPI files for other

operating platforms (for example

for DOS), the Windows ASPI files

must be installed to use the

KODAK Driver.

8-64

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“General problem with

‘Take Picture.’”

An unspecified problem

has occurred when you

clicked the Take Picture

icon.

Close the driver, reopen it and try

again. If the problem continues,

click the Load Camera Firmware

button, and try again. If the

problem persists, reinstall the

driver.

“No ASPI software for

Windows was found.

Install or reinstall the

WINDOWS ASPI

software.”

A problem has occurred

with your software ASPI

manager for Windows.

Install, or reinstall, the ASPI

manager for Windows. This

software, which is not available

from Kodak, should be provided

with your ASPI Windows host

adapter card.

“Some items in this

While working within an

archive folder, you have

selected multiple images, Cancel and no replacement occurs.

Click OK to replace the archive

files with the selected files; or click

location have the same

names as items you’re

copying. Do you want to

replace them with the

ones you’re copying?”

and clicked “Copy To;”

If you click OK, sound files are

however, some images

replaced without notifying you.

with the same filenames

already exists in the

folder.

“The action is canceled. It

can not click-balance

because the click point is

outside the image border.

(The action was recorded

on a picture from a

When the action is run,

the driver is unable to

complete a click-balance

operation. The picture

on which the operation

was initially recorded

came from a camera with

a larger imager, and the

click-balance point is

outside the border of the

image the action is trying

to color balance.

You will not be able to use the

script with this image.

camera with a larger

imager.)”

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“The action is canceled. It

refers to a sequential

image beyond those

When the action is run,

the driver was unable to

complete an operation.

You will not be able to use the

script with these images.

available at the source.

(The script was recorded

with more images than are

currently at the source.)”

For example, suppose

that you recorded the

action with five images

and included a

command to rotate the

fifth image. Now you try

to run the script with a

source that only holds

three images.

Or suppose that you

recorded the action with

five images and included

a command to click-

balance the fifth image.

Now you try to run the

script with a source that

only holds three images.

“The battery is low, and

the ‘Take Picture’

operation can not be

completed. Connect the

AC adapter, wait a shot

time, and try again.”

The battery needs

charging.

Attach the AC battery

charger/adapter, wait a short time

for the battery to charge

sufficiently, and try again.

“The camera and the

computer have been

disconnected. Turn off the disconnected.

camera and the computer,

reconnect them, and then

try again.”

The camera and the

computer have been

Turn off the camera and the

computer, reconnect them, and try

again.

“The camera body is off.

Turn it on and try again.”

The camera is off.

Turn on the camera by moving its

power switch to the ON setting

and try again.

8-66

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“The camera is performing You have tried a

Wait for a short time (for example

wait until the red Card Busy light

on the camera back stops

another operation. Wait

briefly and try again.”

command (for example

Copy To), and the

camera is still performing blinking), and then try again.

another operation.

“The camera or camera

back was not found. Try

the following.

The SCSI cable is not

connected properly.

Verify that the SCSI cable is

connected properly between the

computer and the camera. If not,

turn both off, reconnect the cable,

and try again.

Check all cables.

Check for SCSI ID

conflict.

Check for dead battery.

Switch to an archive

folder.”

The camera SCSI ID is set Reset the camera SCSI ID so that it

improperly.

is different from other devices

connected to the computer. To do

so, turn off the camera, then the

computer. Reset the camera SCSI

ID. Restart.

(With a Macintosh computer the

CD-ROM drive is often SCSI ID

number 3; be certain that you

avoid its number.)

You have connected the

camera to a different

computer (or to the same

computer to which you

recently connected an

additional SCSI device),

resulting in a SCSI ID

conflict.

Reset the camera SCSI ID so that it

is different from other devices

connected to the computer. To do

so, turn off the camera, then the

computer. Set the camera SCSI ID

to a unique value. Restart.

(With a Macintosh computer the

CD-ROM drive is often SCSI ID

number 3; be certain that you

avoid its number.) (Continued on

next page.)

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“The camera or camera

back was not found. Try

the following. (Continued

from previous page.)

The battery in the camera

is dead.

Operate from the AC battery

charger/adapter or charge the

battery from the adapter and try

again.

Check all cables.

Check for SCSI ID

conflict.

Check for dead battery.

Switch to an archive

folder.”

You have deliberately

chosen the driver when

no camera was

Click folder and open an archive

folder from your computer hard

disk.

connected with the

intention of working

with images in an

archive folder.

“The folder ‘folderid’ was

not found. The action is

terminating. Create a new

folder in the proper

location, and run the

action again, or record the

action again to point to

an existing folder.”

This message appears

when you run a script.

The script points to a

folder that does not exist

as specified. Perhaps the

folder has been deleted

since the script was

recorded.

Follow the instructions that appear

in the message.

“The last SCSI command

completed with an error,

indicating a hardware

error in the cabling or

SCSI connectors. Verify

that SCSI cables are

A hardware error has

been detected in the

cabling or SCSI

Verify that all SCSI connections are

correct (if necessary turn off all

equipment to alter the

connections). Try other cables if

available. Be certain that

terminators (if used with your

computer setup) are still properly

connected. If the problem persists,

contact Kodak.

connectors.

connected properly.”

8-68

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“The ‘Load Camera

Firmware’ command

failed. Refer to the

‘Messages’ section in the

User’s Manual.”

There may be one of a

variety of problems,

including loose or

incorrect cables,

Shut down the computer, turn off

the camera, and disconnect the

camera from the computer and the

AC battery charger/adapter. Check

all SCSI connections and cables.

improper SCSI

configuration, and so on. Reconnect your equipment, restart,

and try again.

There is an unusual

condition with the driver

for Photoshop.

Choose the driver. If the problem

recurs, shut down your Macintosh

computer; restart the computer and

Photoshop, and try the driver

again.

If the condition persists, delete the

camera driver file from your

computer hard disk, and install the

driver again.

The “.BIN” file was not

found in the same folder

as the driver file.

Place a copy of the “.BIN” file in

the same folder as the driver file.

The BIN file is supplied by Kodak

on the diskette with the product.

“The number in the

‘Digits’ box is not large

enough to accommodate

the number in the

The value in the ‘Digits’

box is too small for the

value in the ‘Starting

From’ box.

Increase the value in the ‘Digits’

box or decrease the value in the

‘Starting From’ box so that the

value in the Digits box is large

enough to accommodate the

Starting From value.

‘Starting From’ box.”

“The PCMCIA card in the

camera is full. You can:

You have tried to enter

Test Shot but the

PCMCIA card is full, so

additional images can

not be saved to it.

Since the PCMCIA card is full, you

can enter Test Shot and use the

Keep button to save images to an

archive folder.

Enter Test Shot and

save images to a folder

using the Keep button.

Or you can, delete images from the

card, and then enter Test Shot. If

desired, new images can be saved

to the PCMCIA card which now

has room for the new images.

Click Cancel, delete

images from the

PCMCIA card, then

choose Test Shot

again.”

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“The PCMCIA card in the

camera is full. You can:

The PCMCIA card in the

camera is full, and

additional images can

not be recorded on it.

Since the PCMCIA card is full, you

can enter Test Shot and use the

Keep button to save images to an

archive folder.

Enter Test Shot and

save images to a folder

using the Keep button.

Or you can switch to Contact

Sheet, delete images from the card,

and continue shooting. New

images will be saved to the

PCMCIA card which now has

room for new images.

Delete images.”

“The PCMCIA card in the

camera is full. You can:

You are working in Test

Shot and additional

images can not be saved

to the PCMCIA card. As

indicated, the PCMCIA

card in the camera is full,

and additional images

can not be recorded on

it.

As prompted, use the Keep button

while in Test Shot.

Stay in Test Shot and

save images to a folder

using the Keep button.

Or, switch to Contact Sheet, delete

images from the card, reenter Test

Shot and continue shooting.

Stwitch to Contact

Sheet, delete images

from the PCMCIA

card, then choose Test

Shot again.”

“The PCMCIA card was

recovered, but no images

were found.”

You initiated a recover

operation which was

performed, but no

images were found on

the card.

No action is required. If there were

images on the card, they can not

be recovered with this command.

“The required ASPI

software is not found.

Install or reinstall the

WINDOWS ASPI

software, and remove

other ASPI software if

possible.”

A problem has occurred

with your software ASPI

manager for Windows.

Install, or reinstall, the ASPI

manager for Windows. This

software, which is not available

from Kodak, should be provided

with your ASPI Windows host

adapter card.

One or more DOS ASPI

manager(s) is installed

and is in conflict with

the Windows ASPI

manager.

Be certain that a WINDOWS ASPI

manager is installed; remove the

DOS ASPI manager(s).

8-70

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“There is no PCMCIA card You are trying to take a

As indicated, you can insert a

in the camera. You can

insert a PCMCIA card

now, or work without a

card in Test Shot view.”

picture but there is no

PCMCIA card in the

camera.

PCMCIA card now and continue to

shoot normally, or you can work in

Test Shot view without a card.

“There is not enough

memory to complete the

operation. Close

There is not enough

memory to complete the

operation.

If unneeded windows are opened,

close them and try the operation

again.

unneeded windows, if

opened, and try again.”

Or quit Photoshop and increase its

memory size. Restart Photoshop

and try the operation again.

“There is not enough

memory to hold all the

There is not enough

memory available in

Divide the images in the folder,

moving images for which there are

sounds for this folder. You your computer, and even sounds to a new folder.

will not be able to play

the sounds for all images

in this folder.”

the small amount of

memory allocated for

each sound by the

TWAIN driver has

exhausted available

memory.

“TWAIN DCS source

error. Low memory

There is not enough

memory to complete the

operation.

Be certain that the computer meets

the minimum system requirements

(refer to Chapter 1). Shut down

other applications if they are

running and try again.

condition encountered.

Free up some memory

and try again. (Be certain

the computer system

meets the minimum

memory requirements.)”

“TWAIN DCS source

error. (Remaining wording

of message varies). Try

again and/or reinstall the

driver.”

A problem has occurred

with the software driver.

Try the operation again. If

necessary, reinstall the TWAIN

driver and try again. If the problem

continues, contact Kodak.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“TWAIN error accessing

data from the source. The

failure is due to an

unknown cause. Try again

and/or reinstall the

driver.”

A TWAIN-compliant

KODAK Driver has not

been installed or has

been installed

Reinstall the TWAIN driver as

described in Chapter 4 and try

again.

improperly.

“TWAIN error opening the A TWAIN-compliant

Reinstall the TWAIN driver as

described in Chapter 4 and try

again.

data source. The failure is

due to an unknown

cause. Try again and/or

reinstall the driver.”

KODAK Driver has not

been installed or has

been installed

improperly.

“Unable to delete some

images. The folder or disk

may be locked, or you do

not have ‘write privileges’

to the folder.”

The folder or disk from

which you are trying to

delete archive images

may be locked.

Unlock the folder or disk.

Or, if you are working with images

on a CD-ROM, you will be unable

to delete the images on the CD-

ROM.

“Unable to rename some

images. The folder or disk

may be locked, or you do

not have ‘write privileges’

to the folder.”

The folder or disk in

which you are trying to

rename archive images

may be locked.

Unlock the folder or disk.

Or, if you are working with images

on a CD-ROM, you will be unable

to rename the images on the CD-

ROM.

“Unable to save image

modifications. The

destination folder or disk

may be locked, or you do

not have ‘write privileges’

to the folder.”

The folder or disk to

which you are trying to

save archive images may

be locked.

Unlock the folder or disk.

Or, if you are working with images

on a CD-ROM, you will be unable

to save the images on the CD-

ROM.

You have typed text in

the annotation area for

an image in an archive

folder but the archive

folder is locked,

Unlock the folder and try again.

(Continued on next page.)

preventing you from

saving the changes.

8-72

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“Unable to save image

modifications. The

You may not have

privileges to write to the

specified folder.

Change privileges, or write the file

to another folder.

destination folder or disk

may be locked, or you do

not have ‘write privileges’

to the folder.” (Continued

from previous page.)

The folder you were

using during your last

work session has been

deleted or renamed.

Choose a different folder from the

Open dialog box.

You have switched from

Photoshop to the Finder

and have changed the

location of an opened

file.

Choose a different folder from the

Open dialog box.

You have a damaged

hard disk on your

computer.

Have the hard disk repaired.

“You can not copy

While working with an

archive folder, you have

selected images, chosen

Copy To, and tried to

save the images into the

same folder as the

Try again, but this time first create

a new folder or save the images to

a folder other than the opened

archive folder.

archive images into the

same folder in which they

are already stored.”

opened archive folder.

This is not allowed.

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

8-73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Message

Possible Cause

Suggested Solution

“You can not

You can not

Select images only from the same

camera type before cropping.

simultaneously crop

images of different sizes.

Select groups of images

that all have the same

dimensions, and try

again.”

simultaneously crop

multiple images from

different camera types.

The DCS 410, DCS 420,

and EOS•DCS 5 are the

same camera types; the

NC 2000, NC 2000e,

and EOS•DCS 3 are the

same camera type; and

the DCS 460, DCS 465,

and EOS•DCS 1 are the

same camera type.

Although the driver can

display images from all

camera types, you can

not simultaneously crop

images from different

camera types.

“You clicked on an area

that is too saturated to use

for color balancing. Use

the Click Balance tool

again to select a less

saturated area.”

After choosing the Click

Balance tool, you have

clicked the crosshair on

an overexposed area of

the image.

Choose the Click Balance tool

again and then click a white area

that is not overexposed. (Refer to

the explanation of the Click

Balance tool earlier in this chapter.)

8-74

Reference — Kodak Driver Software

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_{. . . . . . .}9_{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .}

Appendices

This section includes the following appendices.

A — Specifications

B — Glossary

C — Updating Your KODAK Software Driver

D — Repacking Instructions

E — Problem Report Form

F — Using an Infrared Camera (DCS 420IR Only)

G — Technical and Telephone Assistance

H — Optional Equipment & Spare Parts List

Appendices

9-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A — Specifications

DCS 410, DCS 420, DCS 460, NC2000e

KODAK Camera Back

The following camera models are available:

DCS 410c (color)

DCS 420c (color)

DCS 420m (monochrome)

DCS 420IR (infrared monochrome)

DCS 460c (color)

DCS 460m (monochrome)

NC2000e (color)

Imager: charge coupled device (CCD) full-frame imager.

Imager size:

DCS 410 —

Width 13.8 mm x height 9.2 mm, 1524 x 1012-pixels.

1524 pixels

1012 pixels

DCS 420 (all models) —

Width 13.8 mm x height 9.2 mm, 1524 x 1012-pixels.

1524 pixels

1012 pixels

Specifications

A-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DCS 460 (both models) —

Width 27.6 mm x 18.4 mm, 3060 x 2036-pixels.

3060 pixels

2036 pixels

NC2000e —

Width 20.5 mm x 16.4 mm, 1268 x 1012-pixels.

1268 pixels

1012 pixels

Image file sizes:

DCS 410 —

Unacquired image file size: approximately 1.5 megabytes (MB)

for each image.

Acquired image file size: approximately 4.5 MB for each color

image acquired normally at 8-bit acquire (and 9 MB when 12-Bit

Acquire is on).

DCS 420 (all models) —

Unacquired image file size: approximately 1.5 megabytes (MB)

for each image.

Acquired image file sizes: approximately 4.5 MB for each color

image acquired normally at 8-bit acquire (and 9 MB when 12-Bit

Acquire is on), and 1.5 MB for each monochrome or infrared

image.

A-2

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DCS 460 (both models) —

Unacquired image file size: approximately 6 megabytes (MB) for

each image.

Acquired image file sizes: approximately 18 MB for each color

image acquired normally at 8-bit acquire (and 36 MB when 12-Bit

Acquire is on), and 6 MB for each monochrome image.

NC2000e —

Unacquired image file size: approximately 1.3 megabytes (MB) for

each image.

Acquired image file sizes: approximately 3.9 MB for each color

image acquired normally at 8-bit acquire (and 7.8 MB when 12-Bit

Acquire is on), and 1.3 MB for each monochrome or infrared

image.

Sound file size: A 105 MB PCMCIA card can store about 2-3 hours of

audio if no images or other files are stored on the card.

Twelve bits/color.

Supports ISO settings as follows:

DCS 410 — 100

DCS 420c — 100 to 400

DCS 420m — 200 to 800 (You can also shoot at 1600 with possible

degraded performance.)

DCS 420IR — 200 to 800 (You can also shoot at 1600 with possible

degraded performance.)

DCS 460c — 80

DCS 460m — 160

NC2000e — 200 to 1600

Specifications

A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dynamic random access memory (DRAM) buffer that supports shoot-

ing as below:

DCS 410 — supports shooting one image at a time.

DCS 420 (all models) — supports a five-image burst.

DCS 460 (all models) — supports a two-image burst.

NC2000e — supports a twelve-image burst, sixteen megabytes

DRAM.

Timing: For all camera models, the camera is ready for the first shot

within 0.25 seconds after the shutter button is depressed. Timing for

subsequent images depends on the type of PCMCIA card being used,

and on the camera model as below.

DCS 410 — If you continue to press the shutter after the first image,

subsequent images are taken approximately every several sec-

onds, with the exact time dependent on the type of PCMCIA card

being used.

DCS 420 (all models) — If you continue to press the shutter after the

first image, subsequent images of the five-image burst are taken at

intervals of approximately 0.5 seconds. Continuing to press the

shutter after the burst records images at several second intervals,

with the exact time dependent on the type of PCMCIA card being

used.

DCS 460 (all models) — If you continue to press the shutter after the

first image, the second image of the two-image burst is recorded

in approximately 1.6 seconds. Continuing to press the shutter after

the second image of the burst records images at approximately

eight second intervals.

A-4

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NC2000e — If you continue to press the shutter after the first image,

subsequent images of the burst are taken at a rate of approxi-

mately 2.8 images/second. Continuing to press the shutter after

the burst records images at approximately two second intervals.

Built-in microphone records sound in “.WAV” file format at “tele-

phone quality”— 8-bits, 11 kilohertz, monaural.

Built-in, liquid crystal display (LCD) status display.

Two external controls:

DELETE. Deletes most recent image on PCMCIA card (if present).

SCSI ID. Sets SCSI ID.

PCMCIA-ATA Type III slot designed to accept PCMCIA hard disk

cards that support the PCMCIA “ATA” interface and operate in 8-bit

transfer mode.

Third-party, optional, PCMCIA hard disk cards, with storage capacity

as indicated below for one card size:

DCS 410 — A 340 megabyte PCMCIA card stores up to 203 images.

DCS 420 (all models) — A 340 megabyte PCMCIA card stores up to

203 images.

DCS 460 (all models) — A 340 megabyte PCMCIA card stores up to

53 images.

NC2000e — A 340 megabute PCMCIA card stores up to 247 images.

SCSI 25-pin, female, subminiature D connector with standard pin

assignments for Macintosh II computer.

Specifications

A-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multipurpose 7-pin mini-DIN connector (for the AC battery charger/

adapter, remote shutter release, . . .).

Single, rechargeable nickel hydride battery that powers both the

KODAK camera back and the Nikon N90s camera.

In typical shooting situations, a fully charged battery (a battery that

has been charged for at least two hours with the supplied AC battery

charter/adapter), provides power for shooting as below. Fewer images

per charge can be taken at low temperatures.

NOTE: These estimates are based on testing that begins with a fully charged

battery. In testing, the camera is turned on, and left on throughout the test. An

image is made and the camera is allowed to sleep; this cycle is repeated until

the battery is no longer able to power the camera.

DCS 410 — battery provides power for shooting up to 1,000 frames.

DCS 420 (all models) — battery provides power for shooting up to

1,000 frames.

DCS 460 (all models) — battery provides power for shooting up to

300 frames.

NC2000e — battery provides power for shooting up to 1,000 frames.

Tripod mount.

A-6

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lenses behave differently when used with the Nikon N90s. The

imager in the camera provides a smaller image area than 35 mm film.

DCS 410 and DCS 420 (all models) — The imager produces a field of

view equal to using a lens with 2.6 times the focal length of the

lens in use as indicated in the representative lenses listed in the

following figure. For example, an 18 mm lens performs approxi-

mately like a 50 mm lens.

A standard AF Nikkor lens . . .

performs approximately like this lens.

135

105

300

500

200

Specifications

A-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DCS 460 (all models) — The imager produces a field of view equal to

using a lens with 1.3 times the focal length of the lens in use as

indicated in the representative lenses listed in the following figure.

For example, an 18 mm lens performs approximately like a 24

mm lens.

A standard AF Nikkor lens . . .

performs approximately like this lens.

105

135

200

300

A-8

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NC2000e — The imager produces a field of view equal to using a lens

with 1.5 times the focal length of the lens in use as indicated in

the representative lenses listed in the following figure. For ex-

ample, an 18 mm lens performs approximately like a 28 mm lens.

A standard AF Nikkor lens . . .

performs approximately like this lens.

105

135

105

200

300

Specifications

A-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Software Drivers

Photoshop (Macintosh) driver.

TWAIN (PC) driver.

Other

Focusing screen modified for imager size; it indicates the reduced

view of the scene to match the size of the picture that will be re-

corded on the imager.

DCS 410 and DCS 420 (all models) modified focusing screen:

DCS 460 (all models) modified focusing screen:

NC2000e modified focusing screen:

A-10

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Universal AC battery charger/adapter, 95-250 V AC, 47-63 Hz.

Safety: UL, CSA, TUV.

Dimensions. Nikon N90s camera body with KODAK camera back

attached: 7.1 in. (18.0 cm) high x 6.7 in. (17.0 cm) wide x

4.5 in. (11.4 cm) deep.

Weight: approximately 3.60 lbs. (1.63 kg.). Includes KODAK camera

back, Nikon N90s camera body; excludes lens and recording media.

Operating temperatures: 32˚ to 130˚ F (0˚ to 55˚ C). Third-party,

optional PCMCIA cards may have more restrictive operating tempera-

ture ranges.

Operating humidity: 8 to 85% relative humidity non-condensing.

Third-party, optional PCMCIA cards may have more restrictive operat-

ing humidity ranges.

Specifications

A-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix B — Glossary

This section provides brief explanations of terms used in conjunction with

the camera. Refer to these items individually in the Index in this manual

to find additional reference material about the following terms.

AC battery charger/adapter. This unit provides a continuous source of

power to the camera, with sufficient power to support

continuous operation of the camera as well as to continue

charging the camera battery.

Archive.

An image copied or moved from the camera to the hard disk

on your computer.

Archive folder. See Image archive folder.

Balance.

Balance features (lighting and click-balance) on the driver

image window, that allow you to indicate the original

lighting conditions under which you took the picture or

otherwise adjust color. Your selection is used for color

correction by the software driver when the image is acquired

into your image editing application.

BIN file.

This file contains firmware, the control programming used by

the camera. You copy — download — this software from

your computer hard disk into the camera when you click the

L^OADCAMERA FIRMWARE button. Downloading firmware is a

onetime action. You do not need to repeatedly copy the

firmware each time you use the camera. Instead, you only

download firmware the first time you use the camera, and

then when you receive firmware updates or if you are

experiencing unusual problems with the camera.

Burst.

A rapid sequence of photographs taken by holding down the

camera shutter release. (Not supported by all camera

models.)

Glossary

B-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Camera back. See KODAK Camera Back.

Camera Control. A window displayed by the driver when you click the

camera control icon of the driver image window. It incorpo-

rates a variety of product features, for example format disk

and recover disk.

Card Busy light. A red light labeled C^ARDBUSY that blinks on the back of

the KODAK Camera Back when data are being read from or

written to the PCMCIA card, for example just after you take a

picture, or when you move data from a PCMCIA card in the

camera to a computer. Do not remove the card when this

light is blinking or you may lose the current image or other

images as well from the card.

CCD (charge coupled device). The type of imager inside the KODAK

Camera Back.

Color balance. See Balance.

Download firmware. See BIN file.

DRAM (dynamic random access memory). Memory in the camera used

to hold an image when taken before it is transferred to a

PCMCIA card or to your computer.

Driver.

The software provided by Kodak as part of the camera that

allows you to access the camera from your computer. It also

allows you to acquire camera images, to set camera defaults,

to test the camera, to update the camera, to manage images

you may have copied to your computer hard disk, and so on.

Also called the “Photoshop driver” on the Macintosh com-

puter platform, and the “TWAIN driver” on the PC platform.

B-2

Glossary

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driver image window. The window displayed by the driver in which

thumbnails or previews of your images appear. The window

also displays controls that allow you to manipulate images.

Dynamic random access memory. See DRAM.

Firmware. Camera control programming. See also BIN file.

Frame counter. The frame numbering system provided by the camera.

The frame counter increases by one as each picture is taken.

The frame counter assigned by the camera appears with

each thumbnail in the driver image window. This is a

different number from the frames remaining indicator

described just below.

Frames remaining. A number on the camera back LCD that indicates the

number of additional pictures that can be stored on the

PCMCIA card currently in the camera. This is a different

number from the frame counter described just above.

Image archive folder. Folders/directories on the hard disk on your

computer in which archive files are stored.

Image burst. See Burst.

Imager.

The light sensitive object positioned within the camera back

that collects light striking it when the shutter is released.

KODAK Camera Back. A sealed, one-piece unit produced by Kodak, to

which the camera is attached. The camera back includes the

hardware features of the product.

LCD.

The liquid crystal display on the camera back displaying

status and control information.

Glossary

B-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PCMCIA card. “Standard,” removable credit-card sized cards that meet

the Personal Computer Memory Card International Associa-

tion standard, that are used with the camera for image

storage.

Photoshop driver. The software provided by Kodak as part of the camera

that allows you to access the camera from your Macintosh

computer. It also allows you to acquire images, to set

camera defaults, to test the camera, to update the camera, to

manage images you may have moved or copied to your

computer hard disk, and so on. Another driver, the “TWAIN

driver” provides similar access on the PC platform (including

access to the PC version of Photoshop).

Plug-in.

Another name for the driver software. See also Driver.

Preview.

A single, large representation of one image that appears in

the image area of the driver image window. Previews can be

viewed in a variety of sizes.

Self-test.

A feature of the driver that allows you to perform a diagnos-

tic self-test of the camera.

Thumbnails. Small representations of images — in a variety of sizes —

that appear in the driver image window. A thumbnail is a

subsample of the data in the full image.

TWAIN.

A set of written specifications developed by a consortium of

vendors, that when implemented in software allows you to

acquire data from a peripheral (such as a digital camera or

film scanner) directly into your software application (such as

an image-editing software) without leaving the application.

B-4

Glossary

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TWAIN driver. The software provided by Kodak as part of the camera

that allows you to access the camera from your PC. It also

allows you to acquire images, to set camera defaults, to test

the camera, to update the camera, to manage images you

may have moved or copied to your computer hard disk, and

so on. Another driver, the “Photoshop driver” provides

similar access on the Macintosh computer platform.

Update camera firmware. The process you follow to move firmware —

the camera control programming — from your computer to

the camera. See also Bin file.

WAV file. The Windows standard sound file format used by the camera

when recorded sounds are saved.

Glossary

B-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix C — Updating Your KODAK

Software Driver

This appendix provides information on obtaining and installing updated

software drivers including:

Directions for downloading software drivers electronically from

several sources. (We recommend this as the preferred method of

obtaining driver updates.)

Directions for obtaining software drivers on diskettes directly from

Kodak.

Directions for installing the software driver and updating camera

firmware once you have obtained the updated version of the driver.

Downloading Software Drivers Electronically

NOTE: The availability of software downloading service described in this section

may vary from area to area.

When Kodak prepares updated versions of the software drivers for the

camera, it makes those updates available electronically on a public ftp

server. Downloading an update from this network is the quickest way to

obtain the most current driver. You receive the driver directly — in a

timely way — at your convenience.

Downloading a driver requires: a modem, communications software, a

telephone line, and access to this server. These items are not supplied by

Kodak.

You access this ftp server using one of the following methods:

Via FTP at “ftp ftp.kodak.com/pub/photo-cd/drivers/”

Log-in as “anonymous” using your complete e-mail address as a

password. The file “Descriptions.txt” in the drivers directory lists all

Updating Your KODAK Software Driver

C-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

files by product, version, release date, and so on. Find and download

the driver for the product you use.

Via the World Wide Web at:

“http://www.kodak.com/productInfo/technicalInfo/

driverSupport.shtml”

This page contains links to driver listings by product type. Find and

download the driver for the product you use by following the

hyperlinks.

Via FTP (or WWW) through America Online (AOL) or CompuServe.

A driver description index is posted on AOL (keyword Kodak, and

then check the Kodak Information Library) and on CompuServe

(“Go Kodak” and then check Library 1). Instructions are also posted

describing how to access the Kodak ftp site through the on-line

service ftp utility. Find and download the driver for the product you

use.

We encourage you to visit our driver site on a regular basis.

Once you have obtained a driver, continue at “Installing the Software

Driver” below.

Obtaining Software Updates Directly from

Kodak

You can order diskettes containing current versions of the KODAK Driver

for Adobe Photoshop Software (Macintosh) and/or the KODAK Driver for

TWAIN-Compliant Software.

If you obtain software directly from Kodak, install it as described in the

next section.

C-2

Updating Your KODAK Software Driver

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the Software Driver

This section describes how to update the driver on your hard disk, and

how to update the firmware in your camera using the updated driver files.

The section assumes that you have obtained driver files as described

earlier in this appendix.

1. Complete all the steps in “Installing the KODAK Driver” in Chapter 4,

except that if the files have been downloaded from a network —

instead of obtained on a diskette — access the files from the location

of the downloaded data (since there is no diskette).

2. Access the new driver by completing all the steps in “Accessing the

Camera from the Driver” in Chapter 4.

3. Update your camera with the new firmware by completing all the

steps in “Updating Camera Firmware” in Chapter 4.

The software and camera are now ready for use.

Updating Your KODAK Software Driver

C-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix D — Repacking

Instructions

If you are having difficulties using your camera, please contact a Kodak

representative before returning your unit for service. (In the United

States, call Kodak at 1-800-23-KODAK (1-800-235-6325). In Canada call

1-800-GO-KODAK (1-800-465-6325); in other countries, call your nearest

Kodak representative.) If service is required, your Kodak representative

will instruct you how to return the unit to the nearest service center for

repair and will issue a return authorization number.

Also, please make sure that you have filled out and returned your War-

ranty Registration card; warranty service will not be provided without

return of the Warranty Registration card or dated proof of purchase.

Please follow these instructions if you need to repack your camera to ship

it to Kodak for repair. Be sure to use the original shipping carton and

packing materials. (If the original packaging has been discarded or is not

available, packing will be at the owner’s expense.)

For system testing and calibration after repair, all major system compo-

nents (camera body, Kodak camera back, cables, and AC battery

charger/adapter) must be returned together.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT PACK LENSES, SOFTWARE, OR MANUALS.

1. Fill out the enclosed Problem Report Form (in another appendix). Be

certain your return address is complete.

2. Disconnect all cables from the camera.

3. Remove the lens from the camera body.

4. Cover the lens opening with the camera body cap.

5. Put the camera into the static shielding bag and seal the bag with tape.

6. Place all major system components (see above) into their appropriate

locations within the original shipping carton.

Repacking Instructions

D-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. Place the completed Problem Report Form on the top of (inside) the

shipping carton.

8. Close and seal the shipping carton with tape.

9. Ship as instructed by your Kodak representative.

D-2

Repacking Instructions

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix E — Problem Report Form

Customer Return Address

Name _______________________________________________________________

Company____________________________________________________________

Address _____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

City________________________________ State ____ Zip _________ — ______

Phone (

) ______________________________________________________

Equipment Description

Camera Serial Number ________________

(See the bottom of the camera next to “S/N.”)

Problem Description

____________________________________________________________________

Problem Report Form

E-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix F — Using an Infrared

Camera (DCS 420IR Only)

This appendix provides information for customers who have purchased

the KODAK Professional DCS 420IR Digital Camera, the infrared (IR)

version of the camera.

This appendix assumes that you are familiar with infrared photography,

and provides only the following introductory material specific to the

DCS 420IR.

The DCS 420IR is a monochrome camera.

Unlike other DCS 420 Camera models that incorporate a cover glass

that blocks infrared light, the DCS 420IR has a standard cover glass

that allows infrared light to reach the imager.

The spectral response of the DCS 420IR is 420 to 1,000 nanometers at

greater than 5% quantum efficiency.

The best focusing (the sharpest results), is obtained if you use Micro

Nikkor lenses. Other lenses will work, but may produce results that

are less sharp, since the visible spectrum and the IR content of the

image, focus at a different point with other lenses.

If you must use a lens other than a Micro Nikkor, stop down to f/8 or

greater (for maximum depth of field which may minimize the effects

of the IR focus shift), or use the IR compensation dot on the lens — if

present — after manually focusing.

Set the ISO only to values from 200 to 800. However, you can use the

Nikon N90s camera exposure compensation to extend exposure

selections. The table below suggests initial values for several lighting

conditions using exposure compensation; using these values allow

Using an Infrared Camera

F-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

you to gain several stops. (If you were to shoot outside without

exposure compensation, the results would be significantly overex-

posed.)

Lighting Conditions

Suggested Initial Nikon N90s

Exposure Compensation Value

for the DCS 420IR Camera with no filter

Daylight — sunny

Tungsten

-1.7 (use a lower value for cloudy conditions)

-2.7

-0.7

Fluorescent

We recommend that you bracket to try to ensure proper exposure.

If you use filters that block visible light, the Nikon N90s light meter

and autofocus will not work. However, both should work if you use a

#25 Red Filter over the camera lens.

Many publications contain information about IR photography and IR

filters. For example, the “KODAK Photographic Filters Handbook,”

CAT No E 152 8108, includes a variety of data on Kodak filters,

including filters intended for use in IR photography. These filters can

be used with the DCS 420IR. This publication can be ordered by

contacting Silver Pixel Press at 1-800-368-6257.

F-2

Using an Infrared Camera

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix G — Technical and

Telephone Assistance

Refer to the following sources for assistance if you have questions as you

work with the camera.

Assistance Needed

Source of Assistance

You encounter difficulties with

hardware, images, or product

performance.

Refer to the troubleshooting sections of

this manual: camera (in Chapter 7), and

driver (in Chapter 8). If needed, call your

dealer.

The liquid crystal display (LCD) on

the KODAK camera back shows

information you do not understand.

Refer to Chapter 7.

You need assistance with the Nikon

N90 camera.

Refer to the Nikon instruction manual

supplied by Kodak with the camera.

A message appears on the computer

screen that you do not understand

when using one of the supplied

software drivers.

Refer to the messages section of this

manual in Chapter 8.

You encounter difficulty with the

camera.

Perform the self-test and update the

camera firmware. Refer to Chapter 7.

You need other general assistance.

Contents and index in this manual.

You are a customer in the U. S, and

you are unable to find answers to

your questions using this manual.

Contact your dealer, then call Kodak at

1-800-23-KODAK (1-800-235-6325).

Technical and Telephone Assistance

G-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assistance Needed

Source of Assistance

You are a customer outside the U. S.

and you are unable to find answers to

your questions using this manual.

In Canada contact your dealer, then call

1-800-GO-KODAK (1-800-465-6325);

elsewhere contact your local Kodak

service representative.

You have a question about the

Warranty.

Contact your dealer, then call Kodak at

1-800-23-KODAK (1-800-235-6325).

You have a question about the

Software License Agreement.

Contact your dealer, then call Kodak at

1-800-23-KODAK (1-800-235-6325).

G-2

Technical and Telephone Assistance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix H — Optional Equipment &

Spare Parts List

Ordering Optional Kodak Equipment from Your

Dealer

To order items in this category, contact your dealer. For product informa-

tion, including detailed information on options and accessories, and to

obtain catalog numbers where not provided, in the United States call

1-800-23-KODAK (1-800-235-6325), in Canada call 1-800-GO-KODAK

(1-800-465-6325), and elsewhere contact your local Kodak representa-

tive, except as noted below.

NOTE: None of the items described in this section is supplied with the camera.

The read-me file on the supplied software driver diskette may provide revisions or

additions to this material.

Item Name

CAT No. Description

Removable media and

lens accessory

875 8377

Supported PCMCIA card plus a Nikon AF

NIKKOR 28mm lens.

Removable media

865 6019

890 3676

Supported PCMCIA card.

External adapter for

Quantum Battery 5

Cable that allows direct connection between the

Quantum Battery 5 (see “Ordering Optional

Equipment from Other Vendors” later in this

appendix) and the multipurpose connector on

the camera back.

Shutter release accessory

899 1473

Shutter release cable that plugs into the

multipurpose connector on the camera back.

Optional Equipment & Spare Parts List

H-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NOTE: For product information on any of these printers, in the United States call

1-800-23-KODAK (1-800-235-6325), in Canada call 1-800-GO-KODAK (1-800-

435-6325), in other locations contact your local Kodak representative.

Item Name

Description

KODAK XLS 8650 Digital

Printer (raster)

Prints 300 pixels per inch, 24-bit color or eight-bit gray scale

images up to 8.5 x 12-inches (21.6 x 30.5-cm) to KODAK

EKTATHERM XLS print paper or transparencies. Print time for

reflective prints is 1.7 minutes or less at maximum image

area including EKTATHERM XTRALIFE (1.2 minutes without

EKTATHERM XTRALIFE), and 3.2 minutes or less at

maximum image area for transparency material. Kodak’s new

EKTATHERM XTRALIFE Ribbon, available in color or black,

incorporates a laminate patch that: protects a finished

reflective print from fingerprints, gives reflective prints

additional light-fade stability, and prevents dye from

transferring to PVC sleeves and folder. The printer can use

the KODAK EKTATHERM Color Proofing Ribbon/CMYK

reflective print paper with a new dye set for matching color

prepress proofing requirements.

KODAK XLS 8650 PS Digital Includes all features of the printer above, and in addition

Printer (raster and postscript) includes an ADOBE POSTSCRIPT Level 2 language

interpreter.

KODAK Digital Science™

Prints 300 pixels per inch, 24-bit color images up to 12.2 x

Desktop Color Proofer 9000 18-inches (30.9 x 45.7-cm) to KODAK EKTATHERM Color

Digital Printer

Proofing Ribbon/CMYK reflective print paper. In addition to

raster printing, this printer includes an ADOBE POSTSCRIPT

Level 2 language interpreter. The printer can use the KODAK

EKTATHERM Color Proofing Ribbon/CMYK reflective print

paper with a new dye set for matching color prepress

proofing requirements.

H-2

Optional Equipment & Spare Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ordering Optional Equipment from Other

Vendors

To order items in this category, contact the individual vendors listed

below.

NOTES: None of these items is supplied with the camera. Kodak assumes no

responsibility for your use of optional equipment from other vendors.

Information about additional third party products is placed in a file on your

computer when the software driver is installed; the read-me lists the name and

location of the file.

Item Name

Description

Quantum Battery 5 (QB5)

The QB5 is a rechargeable, external power pack that extends

the operating time for the camera. For information contact

Quantum Instruments Inc., 1075 Stewart Avenue, Garden

City, NY 11530, 516-222-0611. Requires the external

adapter for QB5 (see the first section of this appendix).

Pelican Pro Case 1550

Software Drivers

Hard shipping case for the camera. Available from Bristol

Boarding Cases Company, 34 Elton Street, Rochester, NY,

14607, 1-800-343-3408.

You may be able to obtain software drivers prepared by

companies other than Kodak that enable you to use the

camera on computer platforms in addition to the Macintosh

or PC, or with operating systems in addition to the

Macintosh operating system or Windows.

You may also be interested in developing your own software

driver.

For information contact Kodak.

Optional Equipment & Spare Parts List

H-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ordering Spare Parts from Kodak

To order any of the following spare parts for your camera, call Kodak

Parts Services at 1-800-431-7278 (fax 1-716-588-3051).

Part Name

Part No. Description

Macintosh Computer Cables 8B5450

8B5471

25-pin to 25-pin SCSI cable

25-pin to 50-pin SCSI cable

Gender Changer

966976

Macintosh SCSI gender changer for use with the

Macintosh IIfx or PowerBook computers.

This item is not supplied with the camera.

SCSI Terminator

692480

50-pin SCSI terminator for Macintosh

computers except the IIfx.

This item is not supplied with the camera.

25-pin pass through terminator.

AC battery charger/adapter

25-pin Terminator

8B5454

3B4701

3B4045

AC Battery Charger/Adapter

Accessory Adapter Cable

This multipurpose 1-to-3 connector/splitter

allows you to use the AC battery

charger/adapter and the shutter release accessory

simultaneously.

Software Package

We encourage you to obtain software updates

electronically as described in the appendix

“Updating Your KODAK Software Driver” in

this manual. However, you can also order them

as below. Contact Kodak for current part

numbers.

Driver for Macintosh Adobe Photoshop

Driver for TWAIN

H-4

Optional Equipment & Spare Parts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Part Name

Part No. Description

Tiffen Hot Mirror Filter

1942655

8250300

1677103

52 mm filter

58 mm filter

62 mm filter

Ordering New Manuals from Kodak

To order an additional user’s manual, call Kodak Advertising Distribution

8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. (eastern time zone), Monday through Friday, at

1-800-233-1650 (fax 1-716-588-4807).

Part Name

Part No. Description

User’s Manual

User’s Manual. The part number appears

on the last page of this manual.

Optional Equipment & Spare Parts List

H-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_{. . . . . . .}1_{. .}0_{. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .}

Index

10-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

)

symbol (Sound files) 6-29, 8-38

Acquire As menu 6-9, 8-13 to 8-16

Contact Sheet 6-7, 6-9, 8-39

Default 8-5

)

Archive 3-6

- minus sign (Click-balance check-

box) 8-37

100 MHz Pentium processor 1-4

12-Bit Acquire A-2 to A-3

12-Bit Acquire (General prefer-

ences) 8-24 to 8-30

Glossary entry B-1

Archive images 6-30 to 6-33

Defined 6-2

Illustrated 8-13

Location on driver 8-3

Photo 6-7

File Format 8-40 to 8-41

Aspect Ratio. See Fix Aspect Ratio

checkbox (Crop dialog box)

Use with Acquire button 8-39

16-bit video display card 1-3

16-bits per color 8-24 to 8-30

24-bit video display card 1-3

24-bits color image 8-24 to 8-30

25 Red Filter (Infrared camera) F-2

25-pin terminator (Ordering) H-4

48-bits color image 8-24 to 8-30

68020 processor 1-2

Acquire Contact Sheet dialog 6-9, 8-15

to 8-16

Illustrated 6-9

Acquired Contact Sheet layout

(Preferences) 8-25 to 8-30

Acquired image file size

DCS 410 A-2

ASPI. See Advanced SCSI Programming

Interface

ATA interface A-5

PCMCIA card 1-6, 2-5

Attachments xi

Hazardous potential xi

Automatic film advance modes 5-4

DCS 420 A-2

8-bits per color 8-24 to 8-30

80486 processor 1-4

90° rotation. See Rotate icons

DCS 460 A-3

NC2000e A-3

6-19, 8-37, 8-46

Actions (Photoshop) 8-47 to 8-50

Commands not supported 8-50

Supported commands 8-49

Active termination 4-12, 4-26

Adaptec 1-5, 4-34

Balance (Defined) B-1

Battery xiv, 7-25 to 7-27

Capacity A-6

AC battery charger/adapter, 3-3, 4-3, 4-4

to 4-14, 7-25 to 7-27

Charge remaining (LCD) 5-6

Charging 4-4 to 4-14, 5-3, 7-25

Cautions 7-26

Charge state 5-6

SlimSCSI 4-12, 4-26, 7-16

Adobe Photoshop. See Photoshop

Inhibited by high tempera-

ture 7-25

Glossary entry B-1

Ordering H-4

Advanced SCSI Programming Inter-

face 1-5, 4-34

All

Button (Driver image window) 6-9,

8-4

Icon (LCD) 4-6

Indicator (LCD) 7-6

None in Nikon N90s 7-6

Testing A-6

Range 7-27

Safety A-11

Use with computer 6-3

Warnings xiv, xv

Proximity to water xi

Accessing the camera 4-36 to 4-39

Warnings xiv

Photoshop Select menu 8-4, 8-12

Select pulldown menu 6-9

Sound menu 6-29, 8-38

BIN file 4-41, 8-19

Glossary entry B-1

Blue 6-19, 8-24, 8-37, 8-46

Bulb setting 5-17

Use for cleaning imager 7-42

Burst A-4

America Online (Download

software) C-2

Annotation window 6-11 to 6-13, 8-3

Character limit 6-12, 8-43

Driver image window 6-12

Illustrated 6-13

AOL. See America Online (Download

software)

Aperture 5-5, 7-2

Accessories

Accessory adapter cable 4-7

Ordering H-4

Acquire

Defined B-1

Button 3-6, 6-8, 6-9 to 6-10, 8-39

Driver image window 8-11

Illustrated 6-10

Location on driver 8-3

Used with Acquire As 8-13

Contact sheet 6-7, 6-9 to 6-10

Images 6-8, 8-39

Cable accessory 7-18

Cables xi, xi to xii, 1-3

Ordering H-4

Annotation area 8-43

Apple Macintosh computer. See

Macintosh computer

Calibration (CAL) files 3-3, 4-34 to

4-35, 6-4, 7-54

Defined 6-8

Applications software (IBM PC) 1-5

Missing 7-54

Multiple images 6-9

Submenu, Adobe Photoshop 3-5

TWAIN 4-37

10-2

Index

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Camera

Access from driver 6-3 to 6-5

Dimension A-11

Humidity A-11

CD-ROM drive 4-12

Charge coupled device. See CCD

(Imager)

Contact Sheet

Acquire As menu 6-7, 6-9, 8-13 to

8-14

Defined 6-7

Charging the battery 4-4 to 4-14

Choose Folder (Source menu) 6-6, 6-31,

8-7

Navigating 6-14, 6-14 to 6-15, 8-44

to 8-45

Image information window 6-12,

8-43

Class B digital device xvi

Cleaning

Camera xi

View menu 6-27, 8-8, 8-11

Continue (Rename Conflict dialog) 8-27

Continuous low-speed shooting 5-4

Memory (Nonvolatile) 4-40

Operating temperature A-11

Power switch 4-9

Imager 7-41 to 7-52

Cleaner pads 7-44

Cleaning materials 7-43

Cleaning solution 7-44

Click-balance

Default 8-5

Eyedropper cursor 6-19

Preferred 6-17

Remove setting 6-19

Tool 6-17, 6-18 to 6-19, 8-34, 8-35

to 8-37

Checkbox 6-18

Illustrated 6-18, 8-35

Location on driver 8-3

Remove setting 8-37

Clockwise rotation. See Rotate icons

Close-up accessories 1-6

Closing Photoshop window (Changes not

saved) 6-8, 6-10, 6-27 to 6-28, 6-33,

8-39

Color balance 6-16 to 6-21

Lighting menu 8-34 to 8-35

Multiple images 6-20 to 6-21, 8-8

Preview 8-8

Control buttons (KODAK camera

back) 7-11 to 7-16

Control programming. See Firmware

Control-click 6-9, 8-4

Controls on KODAK camera back 2-5

Copy (Photoshop Edit menu) 8-12

Copy To (Without a PCMCIA card) 7-24

Copy To button 3-6, 6-31, 8-7, 8-26,

8-40 to 8-41

Self-test 7-3

Sleeps 5-5

Source menu 6-6, 6-26, 8-7

Timing 5-9

Turn off 5-8, 5-15

Weight A-11

Camera Control

Dialog box 4-43, 8-18

Set Clock 8-43

Glossary entry B-2

Icon 3-4, 3-5, 4-41, 8-17 to 8-22

Location on driver 8-3

Camera model A-1

Image Information window 8-43

Camera serial number E-1

Image Information window 8-43

Camera types 6-22, 8-29

Cancel

Becomes Keep button 6-27, 8-10

Calibration file 7-54

Driver image window 6-30

Illustrated 6-30, 8-40

Location on driver 8-3

Counterclockwise rotation. See Rotate

icons

Coupling nut (Camera connector

cable) 7-46

Crop 6-21 to 6-25

Change existing 8-29

Default 8-5

Acquire 6-8

Acquire Contact Sheet dialog 8-16

Crop dialog box 8-33

General preferences 8-25

Rename conflict dialog 8-27

Rename dialog 8-27

Caption area

Dialog box 6-23, 8-30 to 8-34

Cancel 8-33

Crop New Images 8-33

Final Output 8-33

Fix Aspect Ratio checkbox 6-24

Fixed Size 6-23

Saving changes 6-21

Setting saved 6-16

Single image 6-17 to 6-19, 8-8

Photoshop 6-13

Receives annotation text 8-43

Caption field (Photoshop) 8-15

Height 8-32

Illustrated 6-23

Commands (Driver image window) 8-6

to 8-46

Card Busy light 3-4, 4-27, 4-28, 5-13,

6-3, 7-20

Glossary entry B-2

Recording sound 5-14

Cautions x to xvi

CCD (Imager) 2-4, 7-2, A-1

Defined B-2

Glossary entry B-2

CompuServe (Download software) C-2

Computer speakers 8-38

Computer system clock 8-20

Condensation xii

Connector cable (Camera to KODAK

camera back) 7-2, 7-46

Left 8-32

Link graphic 8-32

Navigating 8-33 to 8-34, 8-44

OK 8-33

Remove 8-33

Remove button 6-25

Size dialog box 6-24

Top 8-32

Width 8-32

Index

10-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Delete

Delete last image 2-5

Driver Delete button 6-32, 7-14,

7-23, 8-12, 8-21, 8-41

Illustrated 6-32

Location on driver 8-3

Recover disk after 8-22

Files 6-31

DRAM 2-4, 7-3, A-4

Glossary entry B-2

DRIVE button (Nikon camera) 5-4

Driver 1-1, 2-6, A-10

Defined B-2

Crop (continued)

Freeform 6-23 to 6-24

Icon 6-22, 8-28 to 8-34

Illustrated 6-22

Location on driver 8-3

Overview 8-28 to 8-29

Rectangle

Developing 1-1

Download C-1

Installing 4-33 to 4-35

Obtaining electronically C-1, C-1 to

C-2

Obtaining from Kodak C-2

Ordering H-3, H-5

To update firmware 7-3

Tutorial 6-1 to 6-33

Update C-1 to C-3

Defined 6-21 to 6-25, 8-28 to

8-34

Images 2-5, 5-11 to 5-13, 6-30 to

6-33, 7-8

Remove 6-25

Crop New Images (Checkbox) 6-25

Crop New Images after Shutter Release

(Crop dialog box) 8-33

Cut (Photoshop Edit menu) 8-12

KODAK camera back Delete

button 5-12, 7-8, 7-11, 7-12 to 7-14,

7-24, 8-21, 8-41, A-5

DEL indicator (LCD) 5-13, 7-12,

7-12 to 7-14

Delete mode 7-12

Driver image window 3-4, 4-41, 6-4 to

6-33

Disabled while connected to

computer 7-23

Data Link System (Not supported) 5-17

Date 8-18, 8-20, 8-43

Annotation area 8-43

Acquire button 6-8, 6-9

All button 6-9, 8-4

Delete Originals option (Save dialog

box) 8-40

Diagnostic self-test. See Self Test: Camera

Control icon

Digits (Rename dialog) 8-26 to 8-30

Dimensions A-11

Disconnecting Parts xiii

Disk error indicator (KODAK camera

back) 7-10

Disk icon (Recording sound) 5-14

Disk indicator 7-10

Annotate 6-11 to 6-13

Annotation window 6-12

Commands 8-6 to 8-46

Copy To button 6-30

Defaults 8-4 to 8-5

Image information window 6-12,

8-43

Daylight (Lighting popup menu) 8-34 to

8-35, 8-35

DCS 400/EOS•DCS Plug-in 6-4

DCS 410 6-22, 8-29, A-1 to A-11

DCS 410c A-1

DCS 420 6-22, 8-29, A-1 to A-11

DCS 420c A-1

DCS 420IR A-1, F-1

DCS 420m A-1

DCS 460 4-34 to 4-35, 6-22, 8-29, A-1

to A-11

Calibration file 6-31, 7-54

Install calibration file 3-3

DCS 460c A-1

DCS 460m A-1

DCS 465 6-22, 8-29

DCS4xx subdirectory 4-34

Dedicated Nikon flash 7-53

Default Acquire Resolution (General

preferences) 8-23 to 8-30

Defaults (Driver image window) 8-4 to

8-5, 8-5

Defragger 7-21

DEL indicator (LCD). See Delete: KODAK

camera back Delete button: DEL

indicator (LCD)

Defined 8-2, B-3

Delete button 8-21

Done button 6-8, 6-28

Save changes 6-25

Illustrated 7-5

Features 6-4 to 6-5

Illustrated 6-4 to 6-5, 8-3

Image Area 6-6

Display (monitor) card 1-2 to 1-3, 1-4

Distance to subject (Image information

window) 8-43

Document Name (Acquire Contact Sheet

dialog) 8-15

Done button 3-6, 6-33, 8-42

Camera Control 8-22

Image information window 6-12

Preferences icon 6-32

Preview 6-15 to 6-16

Rename icon 6-11, 6-11 to 6-13

Rotate 6-11 to 6-13

Driver image window 6-8, 6-28

Save changes 6-21, 6-25

Illustrated 6-33

Settings maintained 6-21, 6-32

Source menu 8-6 to 8-7

Take Picture icon 6-27

Duplicate image numbers 7-9

Dust xi

Location on driver 8-3

DOS format (PCMCIA cards) 4-42,

5-13, 7-20, 7-21

Download Camera Firmware 8-19 to 8-20

Download software C-1, C-1 to C-2

America Online C-2

Dynamic random access memory. See

DRAM

AOL C-2

CompuServe C-2

World Wide Web C-2

10-4

Index

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Film Loading indicator (Does not

appear) 5-17

Freeform (Crop) 6-23 to 6-24, 8-31

ftp server (Downloading software) C-1

to C-2

E errors (LCD) 5-2, 7-10, 8-21

Electromagnetic emissions xvi

Electronic flash 7-53

Film speed equivalents 2-4

Filter (Tiffen Hot Mirror) 8-35

Final Output (Crop dialog box) 8-33

Finder accessories 1-6

Fire (Prevention) xiv

Firmware 2-6, 4-33, 4-40, 8-19 to 8-20

Glossary entry B-3

Updating 7-3

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist

strap 7-44

En error codes. See E errors (LCD)

EOS•DCS 1 6-22, 8-29

Calibration file 6-31

6-19, 8-37, 8-46

Gamma (Monitor setting) 4-36, 6-2

Gender changer (Ordering) H-4

General Preferences. See Preferences icon

Glossary B-1 to B-5

Go to image (Navigation bar) 6-14, 8-44

Green 6-19, 8-24, 8-37, 8-46

Grounding xii

EOS•DCS 3 6-22, 8-29

EOS•DCS 5 6-22, 8-29

Erase button (Camera Control

icon) 8-20, 8-21

Recover images after 8-22

ESD wrist strap 7-44

European Standard EN55022 xvi

Version 8-18

First image (Navigation bar) 6-14, 6-15,

8-44

Fix Aspect Ratio checkbox (Crop dialog

box) 6-24, 8-32

Fixed Size (Crop dialog box) 6-23 to

6-24, 6-24, 8-31

H (High-speed shooting) 5-4, 5-9

Example (Rename dialog box) 6-11,

8-27 to 8-30

Exposure

Avoid long 5-16

Compensation (Use with flash) 7-53

Indexes 2-4

Handling

Handstrap 7-46

Hard disk

IBM PC requirements 1-4

Macintosh requirements 1-2

Hardware 1-1, 1-2 to 1-3, 1-4

Height

Resolution 8-23

Flash 1-6, 5-7, 5-17, 7-53

Lighting menu 8-34 to 8-35, 8-35

Flash memory cards 7-19

Fluorescent (Lighting menu) 8-34 to

8-35, 8-35

Mode 5-5, 5-17

Focal length (Lens)

Number (Annotation window) 8-43

External battery adapter 7-27

Ordering from Kodak H-1

Eyedropper cursor 8-36 to 8-37

Illustrated 6-19, 8-36

DCS 410 A-7

Acquire Contact Sheet dialog 8-16

Crop dialog box 6-24, 8-32

Image information window 6-12,

8-43

DCS 420 A-7

DCS 460 A-8

NC2000e A-9

Help (Built-in) 8-24

Help tag 8-24

High-speed shooting 5-4

Hot shoe 7-53

Focus mode 5-5, 5-17

Focusing screen 5-8, 5-16, A-10

Folder (Source menu) 6-6, 8-7

Format

EZ-SCSI 1-5, 4-12, 4-13, 4-26, 4-34,

7-16

Humidity xii, A-11

Button 4-43

Factory Settings (General prefer-

ences) 8-25

Cannot recover images 8-21

Camera Control icon 8-20 to 8-21

PCMCIA card 3-5, 4-42 to 4-44, 5-2

Remove duplicate frame

numbers 7-9

Fragmentation (PCMCIA card) 7-20

Frame counter 5-9 to 5-10, 5-13, 7-7 to

7-9, 7-12

Defined B-3

Frame number 8-4

Frames Remaining indicator 5-6, 5-9 to

5-10, 5-13, 7-7, 7-12

Glossary entry B-3

Features 2-4 to 2-6

Field of view

IBM PC computer 1-1

Driver (Installing) 3-2, 4-33 to 4-34

Hardware 1-4 to 1-5

Display card 1-4

DCS 410 A-7

DCS 420 A-7

DCS 460 A-8

NC2000e A-9

Monitor 1-4

SCSI interface 1-5

Software 1-4 to 1-5

Applications software 1-5

Systems software 1-5

Image

Filename (Images) 8-4, 8-40

Film advance indicator (Does not

appear) 5-17

Film advance mode (DRIVE button) 5-4,

5-9

Film camera back (Not used) 5-16

Archive 6-30 to 6-33

Archive folder (Defined) B-3

Free hard disk 1-2, 1-4

Index

10-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lenses (continued)

Focal length

Image (continued)

Area

Keep button 8-10 to 8-11

Test Shot 6-26, 6-27

Without a PCMCIA card 7-24

KODAK camera back 2-3, 7-2 to 7-3

Connector 4-5

DCS 410 A-7

Defined 8-2

DCS 420 A-7

DCS 460 A-8

NC2000e A-9

Driver image window 6-6

Counter

Annotation window 8-43

Image Information window 8-43

Delete 6-30 to 6-33

File size A-2 to A-3

Filename 8-4

Remove for cleaning imager 7-42

Lighting

Controls 7-4 to 7-18

Defined B-3

LCD "E" errors 8-21

On/Off state 7-32

Sleeps 5-5

Default 8-5

Menu 6-17, 6-18, 8-34 to 8-35, 8-36

Illustrated 6-18, 8-34

Location on driver 8-3

Lightning xii

Link graphic (Crop dialog box) 8-32

Liquid crystal display. See LCD (KODAK

camera back)

Grain, noise 5-7

Height (Image Information win-

dow) 8-43

KODAK charge coupled device imager.

See CCD (Imager)

Kodak DCS 400/EOS•DCS/

NC2000 3-4, 4-38, 6-4

KODAK Digital Science Desktop Color

Proofer 9000 D H-2

KODAK driver. See Driver

KODAK Gray Cards 6-21, 8-37

Kodak imager. See Imager

KODAK Photographic Filters Handbook

(Infrared camera) F-2

KODAK XLS 8650 Digital Printer H-2

KODAK XLS 8650 PS Digital

Printer H-2

Noise 5-16

Numbers (Duplicate) 7-9

Same frame number 7-9

Selected 6-7

Width (Image Information win-

dow)) 8-43

Image Information window 5-17, 6-12,

8-42 to 8-43, 8-43

Data differs from Camera Con-

trol 8-18

Driver image window 6-12

Location on driver 8-3

Imager 2-4, 7-2, 7-2 to 7-3, A-1

Cleaning 7-41 to 7-52

Load Camera Firmware 3-4, 4-41, 8-19

to 8-20

Macintosh computer 1-1, 1-2 to 1-3

Driver (Installing) 3-2, 4-33

Hardware 1-2 to 1-3

Display card 1-2

Monitor 1-2

PowerBook 4-24 to 4-26

Software 1-2 to 1-3

Glossary entry B-3

Imager size A-1 to A-2

L setting (Continuous low-speed

shooting) 5-4, 5-9

Required 1-3

Systems software 1-3

Manual exposure mode

Use for cleaning imager 7-42

Use with flash 7-53

Medium (Thumbnail size) 8-16

Memory

IBM PC requirements 1-4

Macintosh requirements 1-2

Memory (Nonvolatile camera) 8-19

Message(s) 8-54 to 8-74

Camera not found 6-4

Micro Nikkor lenses (Infrared camera) F-1

Import submenu (Photoshop) 3-4, 6-4

Informational data. See Annotation area

Infrared camera F-1

Install software driver 3-2, C-1

After obtaining update C-3

Laptop computer (IBM PC) 4-24 to

4-26, 7-16

Large (Thumbnail size) 8-16

Last image (Navigation bar) 6-14, 8-44

LCD (KODAK camera back) 2-5, 5-3,

7-4 to 7-10, A-5

Instructions

Defined B-3

Disk icon

Recording sound 7-31

IR slave 7-53

ISO 5-7, 5-16

Annotation area 8-43

Begin with low value 5-7

Indicator 5-7, 7-9

Infrared camera F-1

Outside supported value 5-7

Left textbox (Crop dialog box) 6-24,

8-32

Lenses 1-6, 3-2, 5-17, A-7 to A-9

Annotation area 8-43

Behavior 5-17

Microphone 2-6, 3-5, 5-14, 7-28 to

7-31, A-5

Microsoft 1-5

Results of shooting at unsup-

ported 7-9

DCS 410 A-7

DCS 420 A-7

Windows 1-5

Setting 7-2, A-3

Use lower for less noise 5-16

Warning 7-9

Windows 95 1-5

Windows ASPI files 4-34

Windows NT 1-5

DCS 460 A-8

NC2000e A-9

10-6

Index

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Minus sign (Click-balance) 8-37

Moisture xi

Monitor 1-2 to 1-3, 1-4

Determines thumbnail size 8-4

Gamma 4-36

Monochrome camera models A-1

Color balance (Not available) 6-16

Mounting screw 2-4

Multiple images (Crop) 8-33

Multiple-exposure mode 5-4

Not supported 5-16

Nikon N90s camera (continued)

Operating Differences 5-16 to 5-17

Power switch 4-45, 5-3

PCMCIA card (continued)

Format 5-2, 8-20

Fragmentation 7-20

Humidity restrictions 7-20

Using 5-1 to 5-17

Nikon remote control accessories 1-6

Non-dedicated electronic flash 7-53

Non-terminated SCSI device 2-5

Non-volatile memory (Firmware) 7-3

None (Photoshop Select menu) 8-4,

8-12, 8-12 to 8-15

Insert and remove cards 4-27 to

4-32, 6-3

Ordering from Kodak H-1

Recover. See Recover

Release button 4-30

Storage capacity A-3, A-5

Supported cards 7-19

Number (Images selected) 8-3, 8-45

Temperature restrictions 7-20

Troubleshooting 7-20

Use with camera 7-23 to 7-24

Use with care 6-3

Multipurpose connector

7-pin mini-DIN A-6

OK button

KODAK camera back 7-18

Acquire Contact Sheet dialog 8-16

Crop dialog box 6-25, 8-33

General preferences 8-25

Working with Images 6-3 to 6-25

PCMCIA card reader 5-13

PCMCIA-ATA Type III slot 2-5, 7-19,

A-5

PCMCIA-to-SCSI II adapter 4-12, 4-26,

7-16

Pelican Pro Case 1550 (Ordering) H-3

Pentium processor 1-4

Name area (Rename dialog box) 6-11,

8-26 to 8-30

On/Off state (KODAK camera

back) 7-32

Operating Configurations 7-22

Optional

Naming images. See Rename icon

Native image data. See Uninterpolated

data

Navigating 6-14 to 6-15

Navigation bar 6-7, 6-14 to 6-15, 6-20,

8-4, 8-9 to 8-10, 8-44 to 8-45

Camera Equipment 1-6

Equipment H-1 to H-5

IBM PC sound card 1-5

Personal Computer Memory Card

International Assoc. 7-19. See also

PCMCIA card

Crop dialog box 6-23, 6-24, 8-33 to

8-34

Orientation of images. See Rotate icons

Origin point. See Crop: Dialog box: Top

Output Resolution (Acquire Contact

Sheet dialog) 8-16

Photo

Go to edit box 6-14

Illustrated 6-14, 6-20, 6-25, 8-44

Location on driver 8-3

Acquire As menu 8-13, 8-39

Acquire menu 6-7

Photoshop 1-3, 1-5

Acquire images 6-1 to 6-2

Acquire submenu 6-4

Actions 8-47 to 8-50

Camera connected to computer 6-3

Caption field 6-13, 8-15

Driver (Defined) B-4

Edit menu 8-12

Overloading power outlets xi

NC 2000e 1-2, 6-22, 8-29, A-1 to A-11

New Media Bus Toaster 4-12, 4-26,

7-16

Next image (Navigation bar) 6-14, 6-15,

8-44

Nickel hydride battery 2-5, 7-25, A-6

Nikon AF NIKKOR lens (Ordering from

Kodak) H-1

Nikon Data Link System (Not sup-

ported) 5-17

Nikon N90s camera 2-1

Battery indicator (Ignore) 5-3

Camera back 5-16

Instruction manual 2-1

LCD 7-7

P. See Programmed auto exposure modes

Packing

Paste (Photoshop Edit menu) 8-12

PC (SCSI setting) 4-12, 7-16

SCSI ID 4-26

SCSI indicator 4-11

Copy 8-12

SCSI2 connector 4-13

PC terminal (Flash) 7-53

PCMCIA card xii, xiii, 1-6, 3-2, 3-4,

7-19 to 7-21, A-5

Cut 8-12

Paste 8-12

Import submenu 6-4

Menus 8-12

Location on driver 8-3

Open command 6-4

Plug-ins 3-3, 4-35

Connected to computer 6-3

Defined B-4

Erase 8-20

Error 7-10

No batteries installed 7-25

On/off 3-3

Filled oval (LCD) 5-6

Index

10-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Photoshop (continued)

Select menu 8-4, 8-12

All 8-12

Programmed auto exposure modes 5-5,

5-17

PS. See Programmed auto exposure

modes

Repacking Instructions D-1 to D-2

Repair

Required Computer

None 8-12

IBM PC 1-4

Version 1-3, 6-2, 6-4, 8-1

Picture. See Image

Plug-ins

Defined B-4

Photoshop 3-3, 4-35

Power cord xii

Macintosh 1-2

Requirements

QB5 7-18, 7-27

Ordering H-3

IBM PC 1-4 to 1-5

Macintosh 1-2 to 1-3

Resolution

Acquire (General preferences) 8-23

Acquire Contact Sheet dialog 8-16

Photoshop Image menu 8-23

Reverse the ground polarity (Flash) 7-53

Quantum Battery 5 7-18, 7-27

Ordering H-3

Quick Start 3-1 to 3-6

Quit driver 3-6, 4-45, 6-32 to 6-33

AC battery charger/adapter 4-4

Protection xii

Power line surge xii

Power Macintosh 1-2

Power sources xi

Rewind indicator (Does not ap-

pear) 5-17

6-19, 8-37, 8-46

PowerBook (Macintosh computer) 4-24

to 4-26

Cables 1-3

PP (SCSI setting) 4-11, 4-12, 7-16

Precautions x to xvi

Preference file 4-37

Preferences icon 8-23 to 8-25

Driver image window 6-32

Illustrated 6-32

RGB Values indicator 8-46

Location on driver 8-3

Rotate icons

Radio slave 7-53

RAM 1-2, 1-4

Random access memory. See RAM

Raw image data. See Uninterpolated data

Read-me file 1-2, 1-4, 1-6, 3-2

Recalibrate the imager (After firmware

update) 8-20

Driver image window 6-11 to 6-13,

8-28

Illustrated 6-11

Location on driver 8-3

Rotation (Default) 8-5

Record button (KODAK camera

back) 5-14, 7-29

Record sound. See Sound

Recover

Button 7-21

Camera Control icon 8-21 to 8-22

Disk utility software 5-13

Images 5-13, 7-12, 8-20

PCMCIA cards 7-20

Location on driver 8-3

Prevent fire or shock hazard xiv

Preview

Click-balance tool 8-36

Color balance 6-20

Defined 6-15

S (Single Frame shooting) 5-4

S focus mode (Single Servo AF)

Focus-Priority 5-4, 5-17

Safeguards (Precautions) x to xvi

Accessories x to xi

Saturated color 8-37

Save changes (Driver image window -

Done button) 6-25

Save dialog box 8-40

Scripts. See Actions (Photoshop)

Scroll 6-7, 6-14 to 6-15, 8-4

Arrows 8-4

Driver image window 6-15

Glossary entry B-4

Red 6-19, 8-24, 8-37, 8-46

Remote shutter release accessory 7-18

Remove (Crop dialog box) 6-25, 8-33

Rename button (Rename dialog

box) 6-11, 6-12, 8-27 to 8-30

Rename dialog box 8-25 to 8-27

Illustrated 6-12, 8-26

Rename icon 8-25 to 8-27

Archive 6-30

Illustrated 6-16

Multiple images 6-20

Size menu 8-46

View menu 6-6, 6-17, 6-27, 8-8 to

8-10, 8-9 to 8-10, 8-11

Preview View (Navigation bar) 8-44

Previous image (Navigation bar) 6-14,

8-44

Bar 8-10

Box 8-4

SCSI

Printable Area Width and Height

(Acquire Contact Sheet dialog

box) 8-16

Printer resolution 8-46

Printers (Optional equipment) H-2

Problem Report Form E-1

Driver image window 6-11, 6-11 to

6-13

Illustrated 6-11, 8-25

Location on driver 8-3

Cable 4-15

Length restriction 4-18

PowerBook 4-24

Required 1-3

Connection 4-14 to 4-26

Connector (KODAK camera

back) 7-17, A-5

Rename conflict dialog (Illus-

trated) 8-27

Use with Copy To button 8-40

10-8

Index

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCSI (continued)

Host adapter 3-2, 4-12, 4-34

Installing 4-13

Shutter release button 4-9, 5-5, 5-8,

5-11, 6-27, 7-12, 7-16, 7-29

Cleaning imager 7-43

Shutter release cable 1-6

Shutter speed 5-5, 7-2

Annotation window 8-43

Silver Pixel Press (Infrared camera) F-2

Single frame shooting 5-4

Source menu (continued)

Folder 6-6

Copy To button 8-40

Illustrated 6-26, 6-31, 8-6

Location on driver 8-3

Spare parts H-1 to H-5

Specifications A-1 to A-11

SRAM cards 7-19

ID 2-5, 3-3, 4-8 to 4-12

Laptop 4-26

Value 7-16

ID button (KODAK camera

back) 7-11, 7-15 to 7-16, A-5

Identification. See SCSI: ID

Indicator 4-11, 4-12, 7-15 to 7-16,

7-16

Single Servo AF with Focus-Priority 5-4

Size (Crop dialog box) 6-24, 8-31 to

8-32

Starting From (Rename dialog box) 8-26

to 8-30

Status of battery (KODAK camera

back) 7-6

Mode 7-16

Skip (Rename conflict dialog) 8-27

Non-terminated device 4-14

Port 2-5, 4-13

Terminator 1-3, 1-5, 4-14

Not used with PowerBook 4-25

Ordering H-4

Slide Mount (Acquired Contact Sheet

Layout) 8-25

Slide surround (Contact sheet) 8-13

SlimSCSI 4-12, 4-26, 7-16

Small (Thumbnail size) 8-16

Software 1-1, 1-2 to 1-3, 1-4

Software driver. See Driver

Studio flash 7-53

Studio setting 6-26 to 6-28

Crop image 8-29

Systems software

IBM PC requirements 1-5

Macintosh requirements 1-3

SCSI2 connector 4-13

Select All icon 8-45

Software License Agreement vi to ix,

1-1

Sound 3-5, 7-28 to 7-31

Board 3-2

Location on driver 8-3

Select images 6-5 to 6-7, 8-4

Defined 6-7

Take picture 3-5, 5-8 to 5-9, 7-23

Take Picture icon 6-27, 7-23, 8-17

Driver image window 6-27

Location on driver 8-3

Technical assistance G-1

Telephone assistance v, G-1

Software license ix

Multiple images 6-9, 8-29

Select pulldown menu 6-9

Select Source (TWAIN) 4-37

Self Test (Camera Control icon) 2-6,

7-3, 8-22

Defined B-4

Sequence Number area (Rename dialog

box) 6-11, 8-26 to 8-30

Serial # (Image information win-

dow) 6-12, 8-43

Service xiii

Set Clock (Camera Control dialog

box) 8-20, 8-43

Settings (Maintained) 6-2

SETUP program (Calibration file) 3-2,

4-33, 4-35

Install 3-3

Shift-click 6-9, 8-4

Shock hazard (Prevention) xiv

Show Crop Rectangle (Acquire Contact

Sheet dialog) 8-16

Show Tool Tips (General prefer-

ences) 8-24

Shutter release accessory 4-7

Disabled in Test Shot 8-11

Files 6-29

Archives 6-30 to 6-31

Associated with previous

image 7-30

Temperature xii, A-11

Impact on battery life A-6

Termination (Active) 4-12, 4-26

Terminator. See SCSI: Terminator

Test pictures 6-27

Deleted 6-32

Icon 6-29

Not deleted with DELETE

button 5-13

Playing 7-31

Size 7-31, A-3

Menu 6-29, 8-38

Test Shot 8-10 to 8-11

Acquire As menu (Use with Acquire

button) 8-39

All 6-29

View menu 6-6, 6-26

Without a PCMCIA card 7-24

Illustrated 8-38

Location on driver 8-3

Optional IBM PC hardware 1-5

Recording 5-14 to 5-15, 8-38

WAV files 8-38

Source menu 6-6

Camera 6-6, 6-26

Copy To button 8-40

Choose Folder 6-6, 8-41

Default 8-5

Text (Acquired Contact Sheet lay-

out) 8-25

Thumbnail 3-5

Caution with TIFF files 6-31

Defined 6-6, 7-3, B-4

Generating 7-3

Selecting 8-4

Size determined by monitor 8-4

Size menu 8-46

Ordering from Kodak H-1

Driver image window 8-6 to 8-7

Stored with image 7-3

Index

10-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thumbnail/Preview size menu 6-7, 8-46

Color balance in Preview 6-17

Default 8-5

Uninterpolated data 8-40

Archive files 6-30

Units: Inches/Centimeters (General

preferences) 8-24

Update camera firmware 3-4, 4-40 to

4-41, 7-3, 8-19 to 8-20

Windows ASPI files. See Microsoft:

Windows ASPI files

Windows NT. See Microsoft: Windows

World Wide Web (Downloading

software) C-2

Wrist strap 7-44

Driver image window 8-10

Illustrated 6-17

Location on driver 8-3

TIF (Rename dialog) 8-27

TIF suffix (Filenames) 6-12

TIFF file (Caution opening) 6-31, 8-41

Tiffen Hot Mirror Filter 8-35

Ordering H-5

Defined B-5

Update KODAK driver 8-19, C-1 to C-3

User Manual (Ordering) H-5

Utility programs (Recover PCMCIA

cards) 5-13, 7-21

X-Y cursor location 8-45

Location on driver 8-3

Time 8-18, 8-20, 8-43

Annotation area 8-43

Image information window 6-12, 8-43

Timing 7-3, A-4 to A-5

Title bar 8-10, 8-11

Top (Crop dialog box) 6-24, 8-32

Tripod mount 2-4, A-6

Troubleshooting

VGA or compatible display 1-4

View (Default) 8-5

View images 6-5 to 6-7

View menu 6-6, 6-20, 8-7 to 8-11

Contact Sheet 6-6

Illustrated 6-15, 6-17, 6-26, 6-27

Location on driver 8-3

Preview 6-6 to 6-7, 6-17

Test Shot 6-6, 6-26

Viewfinder

Camera 7-33 to 7-40

Driver 8-51 to 8-53

PCMCIA cards 7-20

Self-test 7-3

Tungsten (Lighting menu) 8-34 to 8-35,

8-35

Indication area 7-7

LCD 5-5

Tutorial (Driver software) 6-1 to 6-33

TWAIN

Acquire 4-37

Warnings

Warranty iii to v, 1-1

Warranty Registration card 1-1, 4-2,

D-1

Applications 1-4, 3-5

Calibration file 3-3

Defined 4-34, B-4

Warranty service D-1

Water and Moisture xi

WAV file 1-5, 2-6, 7-28, 8-38, A-5

Defined B-5

Web cleaner pads 7-44

Weight A-11

White balance values. See Click-balance:

Tool

Width

Driver (defined) B-5

Select Source 4-37

Specifications 4-37

Subdirectory 4-34

TWAIN-compliant 1-5, 4-34

Accessing camera 4-36 to 4-37

Image-editing software 8-1

Twelve bits/color A-3

Acquire Contact Sheet dialog 8-16

Crop dialog box 6-24, 8-32

Image information window 6-12,

8-43

Windows. See Microsoft: Windows

Windows 95. See Microsoft: Windows 95

Unacquired image file size

DCS 410 A-2

DCS 420 A-2

DCS 460 A-3

NC2000e A-3

10-10

Index

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Eastman Kodak Company (“Kodak”) reserves the right to change this information without

notice. The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge

relating to the subject matter gained by Kodak prior to publication, but Kodak makes no

warranty, express or implied, with respect to this information. Kodak shall not be liable for

any loss or damage, including consequential or special damages, resulting from the use of

this information, even if loss or damage is caused by Kodak’s negligence or other fault.

This publication contains proprietary information of Kodak or its licensors and is their

exclusive property. No use may be made of it except according to a written agreement

with Kodak. No patent or other license is granted by this information.

9-2

Specifications

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Use of the accompanying software is subject to Kodak’s Software License Agreement,

which contains Kodak’s limitation of liability terms.

APPLE COMPUTER, INC. (“APPLE”) MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-

ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE APPLE SOFT-

WARE. APPLE DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTA-

TIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE APPLE SOFT-

WARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS OR

OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE

APPLE SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES

IS NOT PERMITTED BY SOME STATES. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO

YOU.

IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE

LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES

(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUP-

TION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE

OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLE SOFTWARE EVEN IF APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF

THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Apple’s liability to

you for actual damages from any cause whatsoever, and regardless of the form of the

action (whether in contract, tort (including negligence), product liability or otherwise),

will be limited to $50.

Specifications

9-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EASTMAN KODAK COMPANY • ROCHESTER, NY 14650

KODAK Professional DCS 410, DCS 420, DCS 460 Digital Cameras

Revised 6-97

Part No. 1H6359

Kodak and Kodak Professional are trademarks.

Printed in U.S.A.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ingersoll Rand Heat Pump 650937 XX3 User Manual
Insignia Film Camera NS 13T001 User Manual
Insignia Portable Speaker NS PCS41 User Manual
Intelligent Motion Systems Home Safety Product Excellence in Motion User Manual
Invacare Oxygen Equipment 1148114 User Manual
JL Audio Car Stereo System C5 075ct User Manual
Johnson Controls Furnace TM9VMP User Manual
JVC Gas Heater GR AXM77UM User Manual
JVC Stereo Receiver RX 730R User Manual
KitchenAid Dishwasher W10078153A User Manual